Yamaha CLP-380 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: CLP-380

Categorie: Muziekinstrumenten

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

CLP-380

OWNER’S MANUAL

IMPORTANT

—Check your power supply—

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may

be provided on the rear panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The

voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the

correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graph-

ics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics

appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated

on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec-

tion.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the equi-

lateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important operat-

ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc-

tions in the literature accompanying the

product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead sym-

bol, within the equilateral triangle, is

intended to alert the user to the presence

of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”

within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a

risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is prop-

erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner,

all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify

this unit or commission others to do so unless speciﬁcally

authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety

standards may be diminished. Claims ﬁled under the

expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been

modiﬁed. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The infor-

mation contained in this manual is believed to be correct at

the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to

change or modify any of the speciﬁcations without notice or

obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce

products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro-

duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In

keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we

want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is approx-

imately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the

replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incin-

erate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from chil-

dren. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by

applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required

by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have

the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for

you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed-

eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu-

facturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi-

bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates

the location of the name plate. The model number, serial

number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this

manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-380

92-469- ➀ (bottom)

The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to

constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table speciﬁed

by the manufacturer, or sold with

the apparatus. When a cart is

used, use caution when moving

the cart/apparatus combination

to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug

is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have

fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,

or has been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-

connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause

overheating in the outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from

the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in

the instrument overheating.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-12 1/2

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the

volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, gently remove dust and dirt with a

soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the

instrument's ﬁnish.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry/dry or slightly damp cloth. Do

not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated

wiping cloths.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a

ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key

cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• In the case of a model with a polished ﬁnish, bumping the surface of the

instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to

crack or peel. Use caution.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this

can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism,

possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them

periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• Current data (page 39) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument

before saving. Save the data to a USB storage device/external device such as a

computer.

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

(1)B-12 2/2

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-380.

In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this

Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also,

a separate “Data List” is provided.

Introduction: Please read this section ﬁrst.

Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play

the Clavinova.

Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer

to this section as necessary.

Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference

material.

Data List: Normal (Default) Setting List, XG Voice List, etc.

The Effect Parameter List, Effect Data Assign Table, MIDI Data Format, and MIDI

Implementation Chart are available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

•The model CLP-380 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual.

•The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat

different from those on your instrument.

•Copying of commercially available software or music data for purposes other than your personal use is strictly prohibited.

AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product.

AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product.

Trademarks

•Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

•All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the

unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit.

Tr ansport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the

instrument to excessive vibration or shock.

After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function (page 92):

• Place the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm away from the wall.

•Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 93).

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software and MIDI ﬁles, etc. Any

unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright

has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/formats of

music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play

them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Included Accessories

• “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows

• Owner’s Manual • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide

• Data List • AC Power Cord

• Bench (included or optional depending on locale) • My Yamaha Product User Registration

The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you ﬁll out

the User Registration form.

Main Features

NW (Natural Wood) with synthetic ivory keytops

This type of keyboard features the feel of real ivory. The special Natural Wood keyboard also uses real-wood

white keys. The key surface is soft and slightly porous, giving the keys added grip and a natural friction that lets

you play easily. This authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic keyboards, making

you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. The specially crafted keyboard also lets you use techniques only

possible on grand pianos, such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even

without use of the damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the

sound cutting off unnaturally.

AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

The CLP-380 features Yamaha’s original AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling tone-generation technology that gives

the instrument its rich, authentic voices and unmatched sonic realism. AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) is a

sampling system which creates authentic acoustic instrument sounds by using digital technology to record the

actual instrument sound and applying high-quality digital ﬁlter technology to the recorded audio samples. The

GRAND PIANO 1 Voice in particular features completely new samples recorded from a full-size concert grand

piano. Each sampled note has been adjusted and processed meticulously to ensure the very best sound—with

instantaneous attack and expressive response. This special Voice features three velocity-switched samples

(Dynamic Sampling), Sustain Sampling for recreating the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s

soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and Key-off Samples that add the subtle sound

produced when the keys are released. These sophisticated features and advanced technologies ensure that the

instrument sounds and plays virtually the same as an actual acoustic piano.

Tri-Amp System

The instrument has a built-in Tri-Amp System that features separate ampliﬁcation for each speaker range—

high, mid, and low—providing greater clarity and accuracy from each speaker, ensuring optimum volume

balance for each octave range, and letting you enjoy richer, more natural, expansive sound.

The Acoustic Ambience of a Grand Piano—with the iAFC Feature

Turn on the iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if

you’re playing on stage in a concert hall. Use the Spatial Effect to recreate and emphasize the natural sounds of

true acoustic instruments. The overall sound is deeper and more resonant, especially when using the damper

pedal (Dynamic Damper Effect).

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

By directly connecting the CLP-380 to the Internet, you can use the special service on the Yamaha website that

enables you to automatically play back a wide variety of songs (song data) in various musical genres directly on

your instrument.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Table of contents

Introduction 6

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List......................................................................................................6

Main Features ...................................................................................................................................................7

Included Accessories.........................................................................................................................................7

Panel Controls and Terminals........................................................................................................ 10

Introduction to the Controls ......................................................................................................... 12

Before Using the Clavinova........................................................................................................... 14

About the key cover........................................................................................................................................14

About the music rest.......................................................................................................................................14

About the music braces ..................................................................................................................................14

Turning the power on ....................................................................................................................................15

Adjusting the display contrast........................................................................................................................15

Setting the volume..........................................................................................................................................16

Using headphones ..........................................................................................................................................16

Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment.................................................................................................16

Basic Operation 17

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes......................................................................................... 17

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs............................................................................................... 19

Playing the 50 piano preset songs ..................................................................................................................19

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs.........................................................................................21

Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset songs............................................................22

Selecting and Playing Voices......................................................................................................... 23

Selecting Voices ..............................................................................................................................................23

Using the pedals..............................................................................................................................................24

Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] ...................................................25

Combining two voices (Dual mode) .............................................................................................................27

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)..............................................28

Using the metronome.....................................................................................................................................30

Recording Your Performance ........................................................................................................ 31

Recording a New Song ...................................................................................................................................31

Recording a performance without specifying the recording part................................................................32

Recording a performance of several different parts......................................................................................35

Other recording techniques ...........................................................................................................................36

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] ........................................... 39

Basic file operation .........................................................................................................................................41

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save].............................................................................42

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device ... [Delete] ...........43

Renaming files ... [Rename]...........................................................................................................................43

Copying files ... [Copy]...................................................................................................................................44

Moving files ... [Move] ...................................................................................................................................45

Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir]..............................................................................45

Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format]...............................................................................................46

Automatically selecting a song in storage media ... [SongAutoOpen] ........................................................46

Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode] ..................................................................47

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data .................................... 48

Playing back a song.........................................................................................................................................48

Turning part playback on and off..................................................................................................................50

Supported song data type...............................................................................................................................50

Table of contents

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)................................................................................................... 51

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet...................................................................................................51

About the Internet Settings (settings concerning the access point).............................................................54

About the Internet Settings............................................................................................................................58

Calling Up the Connection Information.......................................................................................................61

Exporting the Connection Information........................................................................................................62

Restoring the Internet Settings to Normal (Default) Settings......................................................................63

Message List (IDC) .........................................................................................................................................64

Error Code List (IDC) ....................................................................................................................................66

Glossary of Terms (IDC)................................................................................................................................67

Troubleshooting (IDC) ..................................................................................................................................69

Listening to the Songs on Internet ............................................................................................... 70

Connections .................................................................................................................................... 72

Connectors......................................................................................................................................................72

Connecting to a USB storage device..............................................................................................................74

Connecting a personal computer ..................................................................................................................75

Detailed Settings 77

Detailed Settings............................................................................................................................ 77

Parameter List.................................................................................................................................................77

Making detailed settings.................................................................................................................................80

Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] ......................................... 82

Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ................................................. 85

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] ....................................................................... 86

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] ................................................................................... 92

Other settings [FUNCTION]............................................................................................................ 94

Message List ................................................................................................................................. 104

Questions about Operations and Functions .............................................................................. 108

Appendix 110

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................... 110

Data Compatibility ....................................................................................................................... 112

Preset Voice List ........................................................................................................................... 114

Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)........................................................................... 116

Keyboard Stand Assembly .......................................................................................................... 117

Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal ........................................................... 122

Using USB Storage Devices..........................................................................................................................123

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (Optional) ........................................ 124

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)................................................................................ 125

Options ......................................................................................................................................... 126

Specifications................................................................................................................................ 127

Index ............................................................................................................................................. 129

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Panel Controls and Terminals

AC IN

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

240

127

110

220

8 @

% *

™

7 )

2 3 4 9

& ¡

6 !

(

£ § • ⁄ª ‚¶

∞

Top panel

Jacks & Terminals

Make sure when using the jacks and terminals to carefully check the names as printed on the panel before

making connections.

Panel Controls and Terminals

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

1 [POWER] switch .................................... page 15

2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ....................... page 16

Adjust the volume level using this dial.

3 [SONG BALANCE] slider ....................... page 38

This lets you adjust the volume balance between the song

playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard.

4 [DEMO] button ..................................... page 17

Demonstration playback is available for each voice.

5 [REPEAT] button ................................... page 22

For repeatedly playing back a single song or specifying a range

(in beats) within a song for repeated playback.

6 [RIGHT], [LEFT], [EXTRA PARTS] buttons

..................................................pages 21, 31, 35

For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required

so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is

turned off) on the keyboard.

7 [REC] button.......................................... page 32

For recording your keyboard performance.

8 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons

..................................................pages 20, 49, 71

For playing back the preset songs, your recorded material,

commercially available music data, or songs from the Internet,

etc.

9 [SONG SELECT] button ..................pages 19, 48

For selecting a song to play back or edit.

) [FILE/SONG SETTING] button........pages 39, 82

For saving recorded songs and managing song ﬁles. Also lets you

make detailed settings for song recording and playback.

! METRONOME [ON/OFF], METRONOME

[SETTING] buttons ...................pages 30, 77, 85

For using the metronome functions.

@ TEMPO [UP] [DOWN] buttons.............. page 30

For changing the tempo (speed) of the song and metronome.

# A – D [–] [+] buttons, Display............... page 12

$ [CONTRAST] knob................................. page 15

For adjusting the display contrast.

% [EXIT] button......................................... page 13

Pressing this button returns to the main operation display (the

one shown when the power is turned on).

^ Voice group buttons............................. page 23

For choosing voice groups. Sixteen groups of voices, including

grand piano, are available. You can also combine two voices and

use them together.

& [VOICE SETTING] button ...............pages 78, 86

For making detailed changes to the voice sound and effects.

* [SPLIT] button ....................................... page 28

For playing different voices on the left- and right-hand sections

of the keyboard.

( [REVERB], [CHORUS] buttons............... page 26

For adding reverb and chorus effects to the sound.

º BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] buttons

............................................................... page 25

For adjusting the brightness of the sound.

¡ [iAFC SETTING] button ................. pages 78, 92

When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper, more

resonant, and more similar to the sound of an actual acoustic

instrument. You can turn the iAFC function on or off or make

detailed settings for the iAFC.

™ [FUNCTION] button....................... pages 79, 94

This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the

keyboard touch, making ﬁne adjustments to the pitch or MIDI

settings.

£ USB [TO DEVICE] terminals ................. page 72

For connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, allowing

saving/loading of data to and from the connected device. The

instrument has two [TO DEVICE] terminals, A (on the left of

the keyboard) and B (on the connector panel at the bottom),

which can be speciﬁed using the [SELECT] switch.

¢ Soft pedal (left), Sostenuto pedal (center),

Damper pedal (right)............................ page 24

For producing a range of expressive effects similar to those

produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. These pedals can

also be assigned to various functions.

∞ [PHONES] jacks...................................... page 16

For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones, allowing

private practice.

§ USB [TO HOST] terminal....................... page 72

For connecting the instrument to your computer, allowing you

to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and the computer.

¶ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals........ page 72

For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of

various MIDI functions.

• [AUX PEDAL] jack.................................. page 72

For connecting an optional pedal, allowing convenient foot

control over one of a variety of assignable functions.

ª AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks .......................page 73

For connecting an external tone generator, allowing you to play

the sound of that device via the Clavinova’s internal sound

system and speakers.

‚ AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks.................... page 73

For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to external powered

speaker systems, for playing in large venues at higher volumes.

⁄ [LAN] port ............................................. page 74

By directly connecting the CLP-380 to the Internet, you can use

the special service on the Yamaha website that enables you to

automatically play back a wide variety of songs (song data) in

various musical genres as background music directly on your

instrument.

¤ [AC IN] connector.................................. page 15

For connection of the power cord.

In order to obtain the optimal results from iAFC, we

recommend that you do the following.

•Position the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm

away from the wall.

•Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the

power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time, and after each

time you move the Clavinova (page 93).

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Introduction to the Controls

This instrument has many buttons and controls—so many that you may feel overwhelmed at ﬁrst. However, once you

understand the basic operations, you’ll ﬁnd the instrument is very easy to use.

Press the button corresponding to the function you want to use.

The buttons are the means of entrance to the functions.

For example, when you want to change a voice, you simply press one of the voice group buttons on the right of the panel,

or when you want to listen to a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button on the left of the panel.

For the functions that are assigned to each button, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” on page 10.

When you press a button, related content or parameter is shown in the display. For example, when you press a voice

button, the voice name is shown, or when you press the [SONG SELECT] button, a song name is shown on the display.

After pressing a button, check the display for the indication.

Selecting items/parameters with the buttons on the side of the display.

Each function may have many items or parameters from which you can choose. To select an item or parameter, press one of

the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. Each parameter in the display corresponds to the A [–][+] – D [–][+] button next to it.

■ To reset the values or parameters, press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

If you’ve changed the parameter values or settings, you may wan to reset them to their normal condition. To do this, simply press

the [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

The TEMPO and BRILLIANCE buttons are the same shape as the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. You can reset the related values or

parameters by simultaneously pressing buttons of this shape.

GUITAR

VIBRAPHONE

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH. PAD

WOOD BASS

E.BASS

E.PIANO

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

JAZZ

ORGAN

GRAND

PIANO 2

STRINGS

CHOIR

VOICE

NO YES

Grand Piano 1

NO YES

GrandPiano1 Harpsi.8'

Vibraphone WoodBass

NO YES

MetronomeVolume

100

Introduction to the Controls

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

■ To execute or cancel the operation, press the B [+ (YES)] / B [– (NO)] button.

When a prompt is shown on the upper right of the display, press the B [+ (YES)] / B [– (NO)] button to execute or cancel the

operation.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from a function.

The [EXIT] button is the means to “leave” a function.

After you’ve used a function and want to exit from it, press the [EXIT] button.

NO YES

Save Overwrite?-->

M-001:NewSong001.MID

YES: execute

NO: cancel

CONTRAST

NO YES

EXIT

[EXIT] button

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over

the keys.

To raise the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear

of the music rest.

3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To lower the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position.

When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down.

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

About the key cover

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid

catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit.

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside

the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or

other serious damage to the instrument.

About the music rest

About the music braces

Be careful to avoid catching your ﬁngers

when opening or closing the cover.

To open To close

Before Using the Clavinova

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

1. Connect the power cable.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper

AC outlet on the wall. For an illustration of the location of the [AC IN] connector, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” (page 10).

In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

Make sure your CLP-380 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name

plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the

power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can

cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-380. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact

your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-380 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some

areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug pro-

vided with the CLP-380. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed electrician.

2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.

The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.

The screen and the power indicator turn off.

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.

Turning the power on

Adjusting the display contrast

1-1

(The shape of plug differs depend-

ing on locale.)

(rear panel)

1-2

NO YES

Grand Piano 1

When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on

the screen.

Power indicator

If you close the key cover without

turning the power off, the power

indicator remains lit, indicating that

the power is still on.

TIP

[POWER] switch

Power indicator

CAUTION

Even when the instrument is

turned off, electricity is still

ﬂowing to the instrument at the

minimum level. When you are

not using the instrument for a

long time or during electrical

storms, make sure you unplug

the AC power plug from the wall

AC outlet.

CONTRAST

EXIT

NO YES

Contrast

Difference between brightness and

darkness.

TERMINOLOGY

Use this knob.

Before Using the Clavinova

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actually

produce sound while you adjust the volume.

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks.

When the headphones are plugged into either of the

[PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically

shut off.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo

headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair

of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.)

CAUTION

Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of

time.

Doing so may cause hearing loss.

Using the Headphone Hanger

You can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the

headphone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger.

Otherwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged.

The CLP-380 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located

on the rear of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound.

In order to take full advantage of iAFC, perform the automatic adjustment (page 92).

Setting the volume

Using headphones

Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment

MASTER VOLUME

MAXMIN

CAUTION

Do not use the Clavinova at a

high volume level for a long

period of time, or your hearing

may be damaged.

The level

increases.

The level

decreases.

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the entire

keyboard sound

You can also adjust the [PHONES]

output level and the AUX [OUT]

output level using the [MASTER

VOLUME] dial.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Bottom surface

Standard stereo phone plug

Optional headphones

HPE-160 Yamaha headphones.

TIP

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

For each voice group, the Clavinova contains one demo song that shows off the character of the voices.

This section explains how to listen to the demo songs for the voice groups listed below.

Demonstration tunes

The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original compositions.

Procedure

1. Turn the power on.

(In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] switch to turn

the power on.

Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] dial about half way between the “MIN” and

“MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER

VOLUME] dial to the most comfortable listening level.

2. Engage the demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.

The indicators of the voice group buttons will blink in succession.

3. Select a tune and start playback.

Press the voice group button for the demo song that you want to hear.

The indicator of the voice group button you pressed will light, and the demo song

will begin playing. Subsequently, the demo songs will play back consecutively

from the upper left voice group button until you stop the playback.

4. Stop the playback and exit from demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button.

Voice group Tunes Composer

GRAND PIANO1 Albumbrad, Lyriske stykker IV, op.47-2 E. H. Grieg

HARPSICHORD Concerto a cembalo obbligato, 2 violini, viola e continuo No.7,

BWV.1058

J. S. Bach

CHURCH ORGAN Herr Christ, der ein'ge Gottes-Sohn, BWV.601 J. S. Bach

2 4

Voice group buttons

Mode:

A mode is a status under which you

can execute a certain function. In

demo mode, you can play back

demonstration tunes.

TERMINOLOGY

NO YES

VoiceDemo

SelectVoiceButton

To adjust the volume balance

between the song playback and

the sound you are playing on the

keyboard, use the [SONG

BALANCE] slider (page 38).

TIP

You can also exit from demo mode

by pressing the [EXIT] or [STOP]

button.

TIP

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Hearing the piano demo (using sampling technology) and

iAFC demo

By holding down the [DEMO] button and pressing the A [+] button to call up the

“Piano Demo” display, you can hear and compare how the piano demo sounds with

and without the sampling technology and iAFC demo, by turning iAFC on/off. The

demo songs are assigned to the voice group buttons as follows.

Sampling technology/

iAFC demo

Voice group buttons

Piano demo Stereo Piano

(Stereo Sampling)

GRAND PIANO 1

Mono Piano

(Mono Sampling)

GRAND PIANO 2

Sustain (Sustain Sampling)

With E.PIANO1

Without E.PIANO 2

KeyOff (Key-off Sampling)

With HARPSICHORD

Without E.CLAVICHORD

StringRes (String Resonance)

With VIBRAPHONE

Without GUITAR

iAFC demo

iAFC

With CHURCH ORGAN

Without JAZZ ORGAN

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 19) or use them for

practice (page 21). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” booklet that contains the scores for 50

piano preset songs.

Procedure

1. Call up the Song Select screen.

1-1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button.

1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the “PRESET” song type.

PRESET .........Stands for Preset song memory. This memory contains 50 piano

preset songs.

2. Select the desired song.

Press the C [–][+] buttons to select the desired piano song from P-001 to

P-050.

Playing the 50 piano preset songs

1-1 1-2

3245

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] button

Song:

On the Clavinova, performance

data is called a “Song.” This

includes demonstration tunes and

piano preset tunes.

TERMINOLOGY

Song select screen

NO YES

PRESET

BAR 001

P-001:Invention No.1

The song number appears on the display.

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

3. Play a preset song.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

Adjusting the tempo

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as

required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the

[DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.

Press either of the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen.

4. Stop the song playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the

top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP]

button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

Playback stops when you press the button.

Fast forward and rewind

You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:

Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast

forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped.

Press the C [–] button during playback to start playback from the previous song.

Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song.

Press the [STOP] button or simultaneously press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)]

buttons during playback or while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to

locate the top of the song.

5. Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

• [-----: NewSong] is a blank song

provided for you to record your

performance (page 31).

•You can repeatedly play back a

single song or specify a range (in

beats) within a song for repeated

playback by using the [REPEAT]

button (page 22). Use the

“SongRepeat” parameter in the

[FILE/SONG SETTING] menu to

repeat playback of all songs

(page 82).

You can play the keyboard along

with the preset song playback. You

can change the voice playing on

the keyboard.

Use the D [–][+] buttons to scroll

through the song name, if the name

does not ﬁt in the display.

TIP

You can also use the D [–][+]

buttons to change the tempo.

Resetting the tempo

Whenever you select a new preset

song, the tempo is automatically

reset to the song’s original value.

TIP

NO YES

PRESET

BAR 015

P-001:Invention No.1

The number of measures

NO YES

Tempo

Default screen:

The default screen is a voice select

screen (page 23) that appears

when you turn on the power to the

Clavinova.

TERMINOLOGY

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the left- and right-hand

parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The

right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part is played by [LEFT].

Procedure

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button

to turn off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up,

indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to

turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the

corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles

between playback on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just

turned off.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the

keyboard (Sync Start)

You can cause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Sync Start).

Hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/

PAUSE] indicator will blink, and the Clavinova will wait for Sync Start.

Now when you play the keyboard, playback will begin at the same moment.

If you press the [STOP] button while waiting, Sync Start will be cancelled.

3. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the

top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the

[STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button. Playback stops when you press the button.

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs

You can turn parts on or off, even

during playback.

TIP

Sync:

Synchronous; occurring at the

same time.

TERMINOLOGY

Resetting the part playback

Both parts are automatically turned

ON whenever you select a new

song.

TIP

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a song or a speciﬁc range of measures in a song. This is

useful for repeated practicing of difﬁcult-to-play phrases.

Playing back a song repeatedly

Procedure

1. Enter the Repeat mode.

Select a song to practice, then press the [REPEAT] button.

2. Start Repeat playback.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

3. Exit the Repeat mode and return to the normal play

mode.

Press the [STOP] button to stop playback, then press the [REPEAT]

button.

Specifying a range of measures and playing them

back repeatedly (A-B repeat)

Procedure

1. Select the desired song for practicing and play it.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

2. Specify the repeat range.

Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be

repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B).

After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

point A to point B is played back repeatedly,

3. Cancel the speciﬁed range and return to the normal play

mode.

Press the [REPEAT] button.

Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset

songs

You can repeatedly play back all

songs from the 50 preset songs or

from the USB storage devices

(page 82).

TIP

Specifying the repeat range

between point A and the end of the

song. Specifying only point A

results in repeat playback between

point A and the end of the song.

When you select another song, the

speciﬁed range is automatically

cancelled and the repeat function

is turned off.

TIP

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Procedure

1. Select a voice group.

Press a voice group button.

2. Select a voice.

Use A [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

For details on XG voices, refer to “XG voice list” (the separate data list booklet).

If you select XG

XG voices are categorized and included in separate folders. You can select the XG

voice group ﬁrst, then select the desired voice.

2-1 Simultaneously press the [–][+] screen buttons located

beside the XG voice name display, to access a screen

where you can select XG voices.

2-2 Use A [–][+] buttons to select the voice group.

2-3 Use C [–][+] buttons to select the desired voice.

Selecting Voices

Voice group buttons

Voice

On the Clavinova, a voice means

“tone” or “tonal color.”

You can also switch between

voices in the same group by

pressing a voice group button

repeatedly.

To learn characteristics of the

voices, listen to demo songs for

each voice group (page 17). Refer

to “Preset Voice List” on page 114 for

more information on characteristics

of each preset voice.

You can control the loudness of a

voice by how hard you play the

keyboard, although different playing

styles (touch sensitivities) have little

or no effect with the sound of certain

musical instruments. Refer to “Preset

Voice List” on page 114.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name

GRANDPIANO1 GrandPiano1 CHURCHORGAN PipeOrganPrincipal

MellowPiano PipeOrganTutti

RockPiano PipeOrganFlute 1

HonkyTonkPiano PipeOrganFlute 2

GRANDPIANO2 GrandPiano2 JAZZORGAN JazzOrgan

BrightPiano RotaryOrgan

E.PIANO1 E.Piano1

MellowOrgan

SynthPiano STRINGS Strings

E.PIANO2 E.Piano2 SynthStrings

Vintage E.Piano SlowStrings

HARPSICHORD Harpsichord8' CHOIR Choir

Harpsichord8'+4' SlowChoir

E.CLAVICHORD E.Clavichord Scat

Wah Clavi. SYNTH.PAD SynthPad 1

VIBRAPHONE Vibraphone SynthPad 2

Marimba WOOD BASS WoodBass

Celesta Bass&Cymbal

GUITAR NylonGuitar E.BASS ElectricBass

SteelGuitar FretlessBass

XG XGVoice

XG is a major enhancement of the

GM System level 1 format, and was

developed by Yamaha specially to

provide more voices and

variations, as well as greater

expressive control over voices and

effects, and to ensure compatibility

of data well into the future.

TIP

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal

(center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to

those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

Damper (right) pedal

When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play

have a longer sustain.

When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper

pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain

Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of

an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. The

damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-

pedal function.

Sostenuto (center) pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press

the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the

notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All

subsequent notes will not sustain.

Soft pedal (left)

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while

the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it

is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.)

With the Vibraphone, Jazz Organ and Mellow Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on

and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 98.)

Using the pedals

If the damper pedal doesn’t work,

or notes are sustained even when

the pedal is not pressed, make

sure that the pedal cord is properly

plugged into the [PEDAL] jack on

the unit (see step 6 on page 119).

Also, make sure that the

RPedalFunc parameter in the

“FUNCTION” menu is set to ON

(see page 96).

Half-pedal:

While playing the piano with

Sustain and you want to slightly

mute the sustained sound, release

the damper pedal from maximum

position to half position.

The threshold at which the Half

Pedal effect starts can be set from

the Half Pedal Point parameter in

the Function menu (page 98).

You can adjust the depth of the

resonance produced by the

“Sustain Samples” using the

Sustain Sampling Depth parameter

in the “FUNCTION” menu. (See

page 99.)

You can assign a function to each

pedal via the “RPedalFunc”,

“CPedalFunc”, and “LPedalFunc”

parameters in the “FUNCTION”

menu. (See page 96.)

The center and left pedals can also

be assigned to song start/stop

operation (PLAY/PAUSE function)

via the “PedalPlay/Pause”

parameter in the “FUNCTION”

menu (on page 98).

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

When you press the damper pedal

here, the notes you play before you

release the pedal have a longer

sustain.

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the note(s),

the notes will sustain as long as you

hold the pedal.

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and

Chorus.

[BRILLIANCE]

You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit

your preference.

Procedure

Press one of the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons

to select the desired tonality.

Normal.......... Standard tone.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]

[REVERB] button

[CHORUS] button

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] button

NO YES

Brilliance

Normal

You can press BRILLIANCE

[MELLOW] [BRIGHT] buttons, and

then use D [–][+] buttons to select

the desired tonality.

Normal setting = Normal

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers to the

default setting (factory setting)

obtained when you ﬁrst turn on the

power to the Clavinova.

If you select [Bright1], [Bright2] or

[Bright3] as the type of brilliance,

the volume level will increase

slightly. Under this condition, if you

raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial

setting, the sound may become

distorted. In this case, lower the

volume accordingly.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Mellow3

Soft and mellow tone.

The sound becomes more mellow and rounder as the number

increases.

Mellow2

Mellow1

Bright1

Bright tone.

The sound becomes brighter as the number increases.

Bright2

Bright3

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

[REVERB]

This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a

concert hall.

Procedure

Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the

reverb on and off.

Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied

when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected.

[CHORUS]

This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.

Procedure

Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the

chorus on and off.

You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF

buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE

SETTING menu (see page 89). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the

panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the

previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each

voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned

on or off according to the saved chorus setting.

You can select a reverb type via the

Reverb Type parameter in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu, and

adjust the reverb depth for the

selected voice via the Reverb Send

parameter. (See page 88.)

Normal setting = ON

TIP

You can select a chorus type via

the Chorus Type parameter in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu, and

adjust the chorus depth for the

selected voice via the Chorus Send

parameter. You can also turn

chorus on or off via the Chorus On

Off parameter. (See page 89.)

Normal Setting:

The normal chorus on/off setting is

different for each voice.

TIP

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody

duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on

page 116 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Dual mode using voices in different voice groups

Procedure

1. Enter Dual mode.

Press two voice group buttons simultaneously.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–][+] buttons and B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to select a

voice.

The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 114 are called

voice 1, and those listed in the bottom row are called voice 2.

3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any voice group button.

Dual mode using voices in the same voice group

Procedure

1. Select a voice group.

In normal play mode, press the desired voice group button.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

Combining two voices (Dual mode)

1 3

31 4

2 2

The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps

in Dual mode using voices from different group.

The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps

in Dual mode using voices from the same group.

Voice group buttons

If you want to select Dual mode for

the left-hand area when the entire

keyboard is divided into left and

right areas (page 28), hold down

[SPLIT] button and simultaneously

press two voice group buttons.

Refer to page 23 for details on how

to select XG voices.

TIP

NO YES

GrandPiano1 Vibraphone

Voice 1 Voice 2

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

3. Select another voice.

Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to select another voice in the same

voice group.

To use the identical voices, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons once. To use

different voices within the same voice group, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)]

buttons repeatedly.

4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any voice group button.

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right

hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the [WOOD BASS] or [E. BASS] voice with the left hand, and a melody

with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 116 for examples of effective voice

combinations.

Procedure

1. Enter Split mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button.

2. Select a voice for the right hand.

Use the voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select the voice

for the right-hand area.

3. Select a voice for the left hand.

Hold down the [SPLIT] button, and press a voice group button to select

the voice group for the left-hand area.

Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a voice.

NO YES

E.Piano1 SynthPiano

If you want to select Dual mode for

the left-hand area when the entire

keyboard is divided into left and

right areas (page 28), press D [–]

[+] buttons.

TIP

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices

(Split mode)

2 3

1 3 4 53 4

Voice group buttons

Refer to page 23 for details on how

to select XG voice.

TIP

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

4. Specify the split point (the border between the right- and

left-hand range).

The normal setting of the split point is “F#2.”

To change the split point setting:

Hold down the [SPLIT] button, then use the D [–][+] buttons to specify the split

point.

(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT] button and play the key you wish to

assign as the split point.

Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main screen.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button.

A speciﬁed “split point” key is

included in the left-hand range.

The split point can also be set by

the [FUNCTION] parameter

[SplitPoint] (page 96).

TIP

You can use Dual (see page 27) in each area (right-hand and left-hand) of Split mode.

F#2

Center “C”

NO YES

SplitPoint

F#2

NO YES

GrandPiano1 Harpsi.8'

Vibraphone WoodBass

Selecting and Playing Voices

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice.

Procedure

1. Start the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

Adjusting the tempo

Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.

To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 5 – 500), use the TEMPO

[DOWN][UP] or the D [–][+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal

(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons or the D [–] and [+]

buttons simultaneously.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.

2. Stop the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.

Using the metronome

1 2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] buttons

The default tempo is 120. (If a song

has been selected, the song tempo

is used.)

TIP

NO YES

Tempo

120

You can set the time signature,

metronome volume, and

metronome tone using the

METRONOME [SETTING] button.

(See page 85.)

TIP

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording

function.

You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an

effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-

hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part.

Since you can record up to sixteen parts separately, you could record the left- and right-

hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble

song one by one to build a song.

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A

cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing,

voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces

sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called

“saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to

facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 104 for an explanation of each

message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information.

There are two ways to record your performance: recording it quickly without specifying a recording part, or recording

several different parts to multiple parts. You can select whichever way best suits your purpose.

■ Recording a performance without specifying the recording part

(page 32)

This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance

without specifying the recording parts—useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces.

In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to part 1 (right part).

■ Recording a performance of several different parts (page 35)

This lets you record the right, left and extra parts separately. Since you can record the left part

while playing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet. Since you can

record up to sixteen parts separately, record the performance of each instrument part one by

one and create fully orchestrated compositions.

You can record your performance

(audio data) to a cassette tape

recorder or other recording devices

via the AUX OUT connector. (See

page 73.)

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Recording a New Song

Appropriate channels (parts) in the

song will automatically be assigned

to [RIGHT] and [LEFT]. Therefore,

[RIGHT] may be assigned to a part

other than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a

part other than Part 2.

If a “MemoryFull” message or

“SystemLimit” message appears

after recording your performance,

refer to the section “Saving

recorded songs to a USB storage

device ... [Save]” on page 42.

TIP

EXTRA PARTS

LEFT

RIGHT

[RIGHT] corresponds to part 1.

Record the right-hand part to [RIGHT].

[LEFT] corresponds to part 2.

Record the left-hand part to [LEFT].

[EXTRA PARTS] corresponds to part 3 – 16.

Record parts 3-16 in addition to part 1 and 2

when you are recording a song which has

many parts, such as a symphony orchestra.

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 16

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Procedure

1. Select “NewSong” for recording.

Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously.

2. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 23).

Set the other parameters, such as reverb, chorus and Song Balance.

Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to set the volume level to suit your

preference. You can also use the dial to adjust the level during playback.

After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press the

[SONG SELECT] button once to return to the “NewSong” screen.

3. Engage the record mode.

Press the [REC] button.

The [REC] and [RIGHT] indicators ﬂash in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button

once.

Recording a performance without specifying the recording part

1 3

4 5

NO YES

------------- BAR 001

-----:NewSong

“NewSong” screen

If you select a song other than

“-----:NewSong” and record on a

part that already has data, the

existing data on the part will be lost.

TIP

Set the tempo in Step 3.

See page 38 for more information

on recording in Dual/Split mode.

TIP

NO YES

SongRecording BAR 001

-----:NewSong

Record standby screen

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

4. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the

keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

The recording screen displays the current measure number.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the

top of the song.

As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to Storage

memory (page 39). When saving is completed, the Storage memory screen

appears.

5. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance.

If you’ve recorded a passage of silence prior to the ﬁrst note on step 4, and want to

play from top of the measure (including that silence or rests), set the “QuickPlay”

function to OFF (page 83).

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the

top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP]

button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

Re-recording a song partially

This section explains how to record part of a song again.

Procedure

1. Select a recording method.

1-1 Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button.

1-2 Press the A [–][+] buttons to display “RecStart” or

“RecEnd.”

NO YES

SongRecording BAR 012

-----:NewSong

Record screen

Measure number in recording

Using the metronome

You can record data while using

the metronome. To do this, turn the

metronome on before step 4. The

metronome is not recorded.

To stop recording in the middle of a

song, press the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button. To resume recording, press

the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again or

play a note on the keyboard.

When you press the [REC] button,

recording pauses. To return the

location to the start of the song,

press the [REC] button, again.

Rename songs

The recorded songs are named

automatically, but you can rename

songs as you like (page 43).

TIP

NO YES

SAVE Executing

-----:NewSong001.MID

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

1-3 Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify how the recording

should start and end.

Starting methods:

Normal: The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts.

FirstKeyOn: Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will

not be erased.

Ending methods:

Replace: The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased.

PunchOut: The data after the point you stop recording will remain.

2. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to

re-record.

Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the playback screen is

displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and

press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the

beginning of the part you wish to re-record.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the [SONG SELECT] button once.

3. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 32 if you wish to change the previous settings.

4. Engage record mode.

Press the [REC] button.

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button. After

pressing the [REC] button again or the [STOP] button when “RecStart” is set to

“Normal” (page 34), “Overwrite?” is shown in the display. To cancel this and not

overwrite, press the B [– (NO)] button.

5. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the

keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the

song.

6. Save the recorded songs.

When you stop recording, the display prompts you whether you want to

overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the

song.

To cancel overwriting, press the B [– (NO)] button.

NO YES

MEMORY BAR 009

M-001:NewSong001.MID

“Overwrite?->”:

Do you wish to overwrite the song?

TERMINOLOGY

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Procedure

1. Select “New Song” and a voice for recording.

Follow the same operation steps as in “Recording a performance without

specifying the recording part” above. Refer to steps 1 – 2 on page 32.

2. Specify the recording parts and engage the record mode.

Record to the right (part 1) or left (part 2) part:

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button.

Record to the extra parts (part 3 – 16):

Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button and press the A [–][+] button to display

“RecExtraPartsCh.” Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify a recording part. The

speciﬁed part is assigned to the [EXTRA PARTS] button.

After specifying the recorded part to the [EXTRA PARTS] button, press and hold

down the [REC] button and press the [EXTRA PARTS] button.

The [REC] and speciﬁed part indicators ﬂash in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button

once.

If you don’t want to hear the right/left part while you record, press the [RIGHT]/

[LEFT] button so that its indicator is turned off.

3. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the

keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. To stop recording,

press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the

top of the song.

As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to Storage

memory (page 39). When saving is completed, the Storage memory screen

appears.

Recording a performance of several different parts

Set the tempo in Step 2.

See page 38 for more information

on recording in Dual/Split mode.

TIP

NO YES

SongRecording BAR 001

-----:NewSong

Record standby screen

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Adding data to or recording over an existing song

The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by

selecting a blank “-----: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite

existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001 – P-050], commercially-available music

data <see page 50>, or your old recorded performances <see page 39>).

Procedure

1. Select a song to be recorded over.

To select a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button, then press the A [–][+]

buttons to display “PRESET.” To select a song, press the C [–][+] buttons.

To select a song from commercially available music data or from already-recorded

data, press the A [–][+] buttons to display “MEMORY” or “USB1” in the Song

Select screen and press the C [–][+] buttons.

To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a

performance without specifying the recording part” from pages 32 to 34.

When you record over a preset song, the song is automatically saved to Storage

memory (page 39) when the recording stopped.

When you record over a song of commercially available music data or of already-

recorded data, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or

not (when recording is stopped). Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the

song.

Other recording techniques

If you record on a part that already

has data, the existing data on the

part will be lost.

TIP

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Changing a voice or tempo after recording

You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a

more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.

Procedure

1. Select a song you wish to change (page 36).

2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song,

specify the measure to change by using the B [– (NO)] [+

(YES)] buttons while the playback screen is displayed or

by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point

slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-

record.

3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).

For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.Piano2, use

the voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select E.Piano2.

When the setting is complete, press the [SONG SELECT] button once to return to

the song select screen.

4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the part

to change.

The indicator for the selected part lights up in red.

Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.

At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data.

5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.

When you exit record mode, the display prompts you whether you want to

overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song.

Before changing a voice or tempo,

set the starting method to “Normal”

(page 33).

When the starting method is set to

“FirstKeyOn,” you cannot change a

voice or tempo.

Refer to “What type of data is

recorded?” on page 108 for

information on the settings that can

be changed here.

Change the tempo in Step 4.

The panel settings on Step 3 will be

saved in memory and you will not

be able to restore the previous

settings. Proceed with caution.

TIP

CAUTION

Recording Your Performance

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and

your performance [SONG BALANCE]

While recording multiple parts one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between

the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance.

Procedure

1. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider to the left or right to

make adjustments.

Recording in Dual or Split mode

When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate

part. The following table shows how parts are assigned to each voice.

CAUTION

When you record multiple parts one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 36), the

existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.

In the following example, RIGHT, LEFT, and EXTRA PARTS n have been selected for

recording.

Note: Part n = Part 3 – Part 16

If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, Parts 1, 2, and 3 are used.

Some commercially-available

music data contains extremely high

volumes. When using such data,

please adjust the song balance.

TIP

SONG BALANCE

SONG KEYBOARD

The song playback volume

will be lower.

Your playing volume

will be lower.

Switching between Dual and Split

mode in a song is not recorded.

TIP

Parts assigned for

recording

Dual Split Split+Dual

RIGHT LEFT EXTRA

PART n

RIGHT LEFT EXTRA

PART n

RIGHT LEFT EXTRA

PART n

↓ ↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓

Parts

used for

recording

MAIN

(voice 1)

Part 1 Part 2 Part n Part 1 Part n Part 1 Part n

LEFT

(voice 1)

–Part 2 Part n+1 Part 2 Part n+1

MAIN

(voice 2)

Part 3 Part 4 Part n+2 – Part 3 Part n+2

LEFT

(voice 2)

––Part 4Part n+3

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Handling ﬁles such as deleting song ﬁles ...

[FILE/SONG SETTING]

File screens (accessed via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button) enables you to handle ﬁles (e.g., save, delete and rename

recorded songs), copy and format medias and change characters on the screen. To connect to a USB storage device, be

sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122.

The following parameters are provided for these operations:

Clavinova memory

The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:

Current memory:

This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the

currently-selected song before playback or recording.

Preset song memory:

This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.

Storage memory:

This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded from

USB storage device.

When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory,

Storage memory, or USB storage device, into Current memory.

You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the

power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not

erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. However, recorded songs

are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory.

In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a

“Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song,” and a song on a USB

storage device is an “External song.”

File

A ﬁle contains a group of data. On

the Clavinova, a song ﬁle includes

song data and a song number.

Memory

Memory is a location inside the

Clavinova in which you can save

and edit data.

Character code

Type of characters

Please note that the copy features

are intended for your personal use

only.

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

Settings

Parameter

name

Reference

page

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 42

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory

or from a USB storage device

Delete 43

Renaming ﬁles Rename 43

Copying ﬁles Copy 44

Moving ﬁles Move 45

Making folders (directories) in the USB storage device MakeDir 45

Formatting a USB storage device Format 46

Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 46

Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 47

Preset song

memory

Storage memory

Current memory

USB storage device

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Song types

This instrument handles various types of songs. Letters and song numbers are displayed

to the left of the song name. The letters indicate the different song types as follows:

Preset song memory

P...............Preset songs

Storage memory

M .............Memory songs

MP...........Protected songs such as preset songs saved to Storage memory, or Disk

Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft songs in the

Storage memory.

MS, Ms ....Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in the Storage memory.

USB storage device

U1............External song

U1P..........External songs such as Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs or

Disklavier Piano Soft songs in a USB storage device.

U1S, U1s..Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in a USB storage device.

Limitation of ﬁle operations

Ø: Yes ˛: No

*1 Only to Storage memory

*2 Only MP songs

*3 Only between Storage memory and USB storage memory

Song types

PM, U1MP, U1P

MS, Ms, U1S,

U1s

Save Ø

ØØ

Delete ˛ØØ

Rename ˛ØØ

Copy Ø

ØØ

Move ˛Ø˛Ø

U1 song with the “.SME” extension

can only be deleted — cannot

execute other ﬁle operations at left.

TIP

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the

“Message List” on page 104 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take.

Procedure

1. Prepare for handling ﬁle(s).

Prepare for handling ﬁles as follows.

To use “Rename,” “Copy” or “Move”:

Select a song via the [SONG SELECT] button referring to the section “Listening to

50 Piano Preset Songs” (page 19) and “Playing Back Recorded Songs and

Commercially-available Music Data” (page 48).

To use “MakeDir”:

Select the USB storage device via the [SONG SELECT] button referring to the

section “Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data”

(page 48).

To use “Save,” “Delete,” “Format,” “SongAutoOpen” or “CharacterCode”:

No need to perform any operations in this step.

2. Access the File/Song Setting menu.

Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button.

3. Select the desired parameter.

Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] or A [–][+] buttons repeatedly to

display the desired item.

4. Set the parameter or execute the command.

Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)], C [–][+], D [–][+] buttons.

For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding

section below.

5. Close the File/Song Setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

Basic ﬁle operation

2 3 5

13 4

The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be

displayed in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to shift to the

upper level.

Avoid frequently turning the power

on/off to the USB storage device, or

connecting/disconnecting the cable

too often. Doing so may result in the

operation of the instrument

“freezing” or hanging up. While the

instrument is accessing data (such

as in the Save, Copy and Delete

operations), do NOT unplug the

USB cable, do NOT remove the

media from the device, and do NOT

turn the power off to either device.

Doing so may corrupt the data on

either or both devices.

TIP

→

CAUTION

To close the File/Song Setting menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.

NO YES

Save Selected?-->

M-002:NewSong002.MID /-

“Overwrite?→”:

Do you wish to overwrite the song?

“Execute?→”:

Do you wish to execute the

operation?

“Sure?→”:

Are you sure?

“Executing”:

The Clavinova is executing the

operation.

“Completed”:

The operation is complete.

TERMINOLOGY

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory, so normally you won’t need to save

songs using this function. However, if a “MemoryFull” message or “SystemLimit” message appear, save the song to

another device using this function.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4.

4-1 Select a save destination.

Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+]

buttons to select a save destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After

selecting a save destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to ﬁx it. Then press the B

[+ (YES)] button to display “Execute?→.”

4-2 Name the song.

To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character at the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 46 one-byte or 23 two-byte characters for a song name. If the

name is longer than the screen, use the C [–][+] buttons to move the cursor and

scroll the name.

4-3 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

The song is automatically numbered.

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save]

NO YES

Save Selected?-->

M-001:NewSong001.MID /-

Do not turn off the power before the

save operation is completed. If you

turn off the power to the Clavinova

before the save operation is

completed, the recorded song will

be lost.

CAUTION

The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be

displayed in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to shift to the

upper level.

TIP

→

You can change the type of

characters on the screen using the

“CharacterCode” parameter.

TIP

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

CAUTION

If Storage memory contains one or

more songs, and you save a new

song, the Clavinova automatically

sorts the songs alphabetically and

renumbers them.

TIP

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

This deletes a song from Storage memory or from a USB storage device. It is not possible to delete a preset song or current

song.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4.

4-1 Press the C [–][+] buttons to select a song to delete.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

You can change a song’s title except for the preset songs and [-----: NewSong].

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4.

4. Name the song as described in the “Save” section

(page 42).

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from

a USB storage device ... [Delete]

NO YES

Delete Execute?-->

U1-001:NewSong001 /-

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

CAUTION

After you delete a song, the

Clavinova automatically updates

the song numbers.

When you delete a folder, all ﬁles

within that folder will be deleted.

TIP

The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be

displayed in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to shift to the

upper level.

TIP

→

Renaming ﬁles ... [Rename]

NO YES

Rename Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong001

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

CAUTION

To rename a folder

To rename a folder, select

“Rename” then select the folder by

pressing the [SONG SELECT]

button and the C [–][+] buttons.

(The folder name is shown after

“DIR:.”) To select another level in

this display, press the D [–][+]

buttons. (Other levels can be

selected when “ / ” is shown in

the display.) After that, select

“Rename” again and rename the

folder.

After you rename a song, the

Clavinova sorts songs

alphabetically and renumbers

them.

TIP

→

TIP

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

You can copy songs. However, you cannot copy ﬁles to the same root directory or same folder.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4.

4-1 When you copy a song to/from a USB storage device,

make sure that a USB storage device is connected to the

instrument.

4-2 Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and

press the C [–][+] buttons to select a copy destination

(Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a

copy destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to ﬁx it.

4-3 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

Copying ﬁles ... [Copy]

NO YES

Copy Execute?-->

U1-001:NewaSong001 /-

Please note that the copy features

are intended for your personal use

only.

Root:

The highest level of a hierarchical

structure. This indicates an area

which does not belong to a folder.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Copy operation

You can copy ﬁles to other memory location.

File A

File B

Storage memory

Can be copied.

USB storage device

You can copy ﬁles to a folder but not on the same root directory.

File A

File B

File A

Folder

Cannot be copied.

Can be copied.

USB storage device

Protected songs cannot be copied.

Please note that the copy features

are intended for your personal use

only.

You cannot copy a folder.

The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be

displayed in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to shift to the

upper level.

TIP

→

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

CAUTION

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

You can move (cut and paste) songs.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4-1 When you move a song to/from a USB storage device,

make sure that a USB storage device is connected to the

instrument.

Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+]

buttons to select a move destination (Storage memory or USB storage device).

After selecting a move destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to ﬁx it.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

You can create folders (directories) on the USB storage device to organize songs. This instrument enables you to create

folders only in the USB storage device—not in the Preset song memory and Storage memory.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4-1 Follow the steps “Saving recorded songs to a USB storage

device” on page 42 to name the folder.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

The folder is created in the root directory in the USB1 (indicated by “U1” in this

display) device.

Moving ﬁles ... [Move]

NO YES

Move Execute?-->

U1-001:NewSong001 /-

Preset songs and some protected

songs cannot be moved.

You cannot move a folder.

The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be

displayed in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to shift to the

upper level.

TIP

→

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

CAUTION

Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir]

NO YES

MakeDir Execute?-->

U1 :NewDir_

To make a folder for the

selected drive or level

To make a folder for the selected

drive or level, select “MakeDir”

then select “USB” by pressing the

[SONG SELECT] button. In this

display, press the A [–][+] button to

select another drive. Press the

D [–][+] button to select another

level. After that, select “MakeDir”

again and make a folder, following

step 4 at left.

TIP

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

Root:

The highest level of a hierarchical

structure. This indicates an area

which does not belong to a folder.

CAUTION

TERMINOLOGY

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

You can format media so that it can be used with the Clavinova.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure

for step 4.

4-1 If some USB storage devices are recognized by the

instrument, press the C [–][+] buttons to select a device.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

Specify whether a song (not contain in a folder) which does not contain to a folder will automatically be opened when

you insert the media.

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4 Use D [–][+] button to select ON or OFF.

Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format]

NO YES

Format Execute?-->

USB1

Do not turn off the power or eject

the media while “Executing” is

shown in the display.

CAUTION

Automatically selecting a song in storage media ...

[SongAutoOpen]

NO YES

SongAutoOpen

When a USB storage device is

connected to the instrument, a

song in the device will not

automatically open. A song is

automatically opened only when

media is inserted to a drive.

Therefore, this function cannot be

used for devices which do not use

removable media—such as USB

ﬂash memory or hard disk drive.

TIP

Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.

The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”

Procedure

See page 41 for information on basic operations.

The following is a detailed procedure for step 4.

4 Use D [–][+] button to select International or Japanese.

Options: International, Japanese

Character list

International

Japanese

Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode]

NO YES

CharacterCode

Japanese

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and

Commercially-available Music Data

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 31) as well as

commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along with the

playback.

Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you

may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200 – 300KB, however this may differ depending

on the data contents of each song.

If you want to play back an External song on this instrument, connect the USB storage device and insert the appropriate

media into the device. Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB

[TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122.

Procedure

1. Display the song select screen.

1-1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button.

1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the song type:

“MEMORY” or “USB1.”

MEMORY .....Stands for Storage memory. This memory contains recorded songs

or copied songs. “MEMORY” is not displayed when this memory

does not contain any songs.

USB1 .............Stands for USB storage device. This device contains commercially

available song data, etc. “USB1” is not displayed when the USB

storage device is not connected to the instrument.

When several USB storage devices are recognized to the instrument,

numbers are added after “USB,” like “USB1,” “USB2”... The

numbers are not ﬁxed and may change according to the order in

which the devices are connected and disconnected.

See page 50 for information on the

types of song data that can be

played on the Clavinova.

Change the Clavinova’s character

type ([CharacterCode]) as

appropriate for the selected song

(page 47).

TIP

Playing back a song

34 5

-1 1-2

You can enjoy ensemble

performance by yourself. Record

the parts for a four-handed song or

a piano duet, then play the

recorded part while playing the

other part on the keyboard.

You can repeat playback a single

song via the [Repeat] button

(page 22) or repeat playback all

songs by using the “SongRepeat”

function (page 82).

TIP

NO YES

USB1 Bar 001

U1-001:Song001.MID

Song select screen

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

2. Select the desired song.

Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a song or folder.

Letters indicating song types and song numbers are shown on the left of the song

names, while letters indicating song types are shown on the left of folder names.

In addition, folders are indicated by “DIR” at the left of the corresponding name.

See page 40 for details regarding the letters used to indicate song types.

3. Start playback.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the

keyboard (Sync Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the

“Sync Start” function.

To enter Sync Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and

press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Sync Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is

in Sync Start standby mode.

You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using

the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is

playing or stopped.

You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also

play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice

from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and

your current performance using the [SONG BALANCE] slider. (See page 38.)

Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen.

Adjusting the tempo

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as

required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo)

is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.

Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen.

4. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top

of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button.

You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback

pauses when you press the button.

5. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

If the song name extends beyond

what can be displayed in the

screen, you can press the D [+]

button to move toward the right in

steps of one character. Press the D

[–] button to move back to the left

in steps of one character.

The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be

displayed in the lower right of the

screen. In this case, you can use

the D [+] button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to shift to the

upper level.

It is a good idea to shorten long

folder names (i.e., over 13

characters) on your computer

before using them. See

"Troubleshooting" (page 111) for

more details regarding the display

of folder names.

TIP

→

TIP

NO YES

USB1 Bar 005

U1-001:Song001.MID

The bar number in playback

Bar: measure

You can play the metronome along

with the song playback. When you

stop playback, the metronome is

also stopped.

Press the C [+] button during

playback to start playback from the

next song. Press the C [–] button

during playback to start playback

from the previous song.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these part buttons turn off the

indicators, and the data on those parts will not be played. Pressing the part buttons

toggles part playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off.

Data formats that can be played on the CLP-380

The Clavinova CLP-380 plays song data in the following formats:

Sequence format

• SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1

• ESEQ

Performance data recorded on the CLP-380 is saved as SMF format 0.

Voice arrangement format

• XG voice arrangement

• GM system level 1 voice arrangement

• GM system level 2 voice arrangement

• DOC voice arrangement

Performance data recorded with preset XG voices on the CLP-380 can be played on other

XG-compatible instruments.

See the separate “Data List” for the XG voice list.

Floppy disk format

• 3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format

• 3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format

Refer to “Data Compatibility” on page 112 for more information on formats.

Turning part playback on and off

You can practice a part or phrase

using the “SongRepeat (page 82)”

and “PhraseMark (page 82)”

parameters in the “FILE/SONG

SETTING” menu.

Appropriate channels (parts) in the

song will automatically be assigned

to [RIGHT] and [LEFT]. Therefore,

[RIGHT] may be assigned to a part

other than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a

part other than Part 2.

TIP

Supported song data type

Sequence format:

A structured method for recording

performance data.

Voice arrangement format:

A structured method for numbering

the voices for assignment.

This instrument can play GS format

songs. However, the voices may

not be completely the same as

used in the original.

Disk format:

A structured method for writing

data to disk.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

This feature lets you directly connect your instrument to the Internet.

A service in the special Yamaha website enables you to play back a range of songs (song

data) in various musical genres.

For the latest services, refer to the Yamaha website:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

Here in this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to

computers and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to

the “Glossary of Terms (IDC)” on page 67.

In addition, since information and conﬁrmation messages sometimes appear on the

screen to facilitate operation, you can refer to the “Message List (IDC)” on page 64 and

“Message List” on page 104 for an explanation of the messages, appropriate actions to

take, and troubleshooting information.

You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical ﬁber,

cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router.

To use the Internet connection, you will ﬁrst need to subscribe to an Internet service or

provider.

Procedure

1. Select the connection environment of your computer

from the following.

Connecting the Instrument to the Internet

Due to EU regulations, users within

Europe should use an STP

(shielded twisted pair) cable to

prevent electromagnetic

interference.

CAUTION

Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the

instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument

itself.

Depending on the Internet

connection, you may not be able to

connect to two or more devices (for

example, a computer and the

instrument), depending on the

contract with the provider. This

means you cannot connect with the

instrument. If in doubt, check your

contract or contact your provider.

TIP

Connection environment

Reference

page

Using a Cable Connection (Using DHCP) page 52

Using a Wireless LAN (Using a Wireless Game Adaptor; using DHCP) page 52

Using a Wireless LAN (Using a USB Wireless LAN Adaptor; using DHCP) page 53

Using a Cable Connection (Using Static IP Address, Proxy Server)

Using a Wireless LAN (Using Static IP Address, Proxy Server)

page 57

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Using a Cable Connection (Using DHCP)

2. Connect the devices according to the example.

First turn the power of the instrument off, then connect the LAN cable

to the [LAN] port on the instrument, and ﬁnally turn the power on

again.

Connection example: Connecting by cable (using a modem without

router)

Connection example: Connecting by cable (using a modem with

router)

3. Connect the instrument to the Internet.

You do not need to make Internet settings. You can access the Internet simply by

connecting a router or a modem equipped with a router to the instrument via a

LAN cable.

You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs,

see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70.

Using a Wireless LAN (Using a Wireless Game

Adaptor; using DHCP)

2. Connect the devices according to the example.

First turn the power of the instrument off, then connect the wireless

game adaptor to the [LAN] port on the instrument, and ﬁnally turn the

power on again.

Modem*

No router

capability

Router

Cable type

LAN cable

[LAN] port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,

optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

For an illustration of the location of

the [LAN] port, see “Panel Controls

and Terminals” (page 10).

Some types of modems require an

optional Ethernet hub network for

simultaneously connecting to

several devices (such as computer,

musical instrument, etc.).

TIP

Modem*

with router

LAN cable

[LAN] port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,

optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

The most common router and

modem equipped with a router

have a DHCP function.

TIP

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connection example: Wireless connection (using a wireless game

adaptor)

3. Connect the instrument to the Internet.

You do not need to make Internet settings. You can access the Internet simply by

connecting a wireless game adaptor to the instrument.

You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs,

see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70.

Using a Wireless LAN (Using a USB Wireless LAN

Adaptor; using DHCP)

For important information on the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, refer to the section

“Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122.

2. Connect the devices according to the example.

First turn the power of the instrument off, then connect the USB

wireless LAN adaptor to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal on the

instrument, and ﬁnally turn the power on again.

Connection example: Wireless connection (using a USB wireless LAN

adaptor)

3. Connect the instrument to the Internet.

Yo u’ll need to make Internet settings on the instrument explained in the section

“About the Internet Settings (settings concerning the access point)” on page 54.

Making the Internet settings might take some time.

Modem*

Access

point

[LAN] port

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,

optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

Wireless game adaptor

For an illustration of the location of

the [LAN] port, see “Panel Controls

and Terminals” (page 10).

For a list of wireless game adaptors

whose compatibility has been

conﬁrmed by Yamaha, refer to the

website:

http://music.yamaha.com/

download/

In addition to the modem or an

access point, this connection

requires a router.

The wireless game adaptor

requires settings such as the

access point. For information about

how to make settings, read the

owner's manual for the product you

are using.

TIP

For an illustration of the location of

the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, see

“Panel Controls and Terminals”

(page 10).

For a list of USB wireless LAN

adaptors whose compatibility has

been conﬁrmed by Yamaha, refer

to the website:

http://music.yamaha.com/

download/

In addition to the modem or an

access point, this connection

requires a router.

This instrument is encrypted in

WEP format only.

TIP

Modem*

Access

point

USB wireless LAN adaptor

* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,

optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

When you use Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the ﬁrst time, you should make the

Internet settings on the instrument, then save all of the settings.

Make a written note of the settings, in case you have to enter them again.

Searching for and selecting the access point

When searching for an access point, the display shows the access point(s) near the

Clavinova. Once you select the desired access point, the SSID and channel are

automatically set.

The WEP key is not entered automatically. You have to enter it by yourself if you select an

encrypted access point (key icon “ 



” appears).

Procedure

1. Call up the Internet Settings screen.

Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC]

button.

About the Internet Settings (settings concerning the access point)

You do not need to make Internet

settings here if you are using a

cable connection (using DHCP), a

wireless LAN (using a wireless

game adaptor; using DHCP), or a

cable connection/wireless LAN

(using static IP address, proxy

server).

About the conﬁrmation and

changes in the setting of the

access point side, read the owner's

manual for the product you are

using.

Conﬁrm that the power of the

access point is on.

TIP

Access point SSID

Channel

Encryption YES NO

WEP key —

13-1 4-2 4-31

2 3-2 4-1 4-4

NO YES

Wireless Execute?-->

NetworkSearch

Internet Settings screen

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

2. Search for the access point(s).

Press the B [+(YES)] button to search for the access point(s).

The access point(s) is displayed on the screen.

3. Select the access point.

3-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to display the desired access

point.

3-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to select the access point.

No key icon

Because your access point is not an encrypted setting, you don’t need to make a

setting for the WEP key. Please proceed to “Saving the Settings and Checking the

Connection” on page 57. If you want to encrypt the access point, change this in

the settings of the access point side.

With key icon “ 



”

The display for inputting the WEP key is called up in step 4.

4. Input the WEP key.

4-1 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the WEP Key Input

screen.

If no signal from the access point is

received, the access point cannot

be displayed.

TIP

NO YES

Wireless Execute?-->

NetworkSearch

NO YES

Wireless Select?-->

:abcdefghijk(C01)

Access point(s)

Key icon

SSID

Channel

If the access point extends beyond

what can be displayed in the

screen, you can press the D [+]

button to move toward the right in

one-character steps. Press the

D [–] button to move back to the

left in one-character steps.

TIP

NO YES

Wireless Input?-->

WEPkey:

WEP Key Input screen

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

4-2 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the C [–][+]

buttons.

4-3 Select a character at the cursor by using the D [–][+]

buttons.

Insert a space

Move the cursor to the position you want to insert the space, and press the

C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

Delete a character

Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the D [–][+]

buttons simultaneously.

WEP key character list

4-4 Set the WEP key input by using the B [+ (YES)] button.

When you set the WEP key input, the characters are shown as “******.”

4-5 Actually enter the WEP key input by using the B [+ (YES)]

button.

NO YES

Wireless Input?-->

WEPkey:abcde

Cursor

To cancel the WEP key input, press

the B [– (NO)] button and return to

the WEP Key Input screen.

If the WEP key input is incorrect, re-

input it.

TIP

a~z

A~Z

@ . –

–

! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , / : ; < = > ?

` { | }[ ¥ ] ^ ~

0~9

NO YES

Wireless Set?-->

*****

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Saving the Settings and Checking the Connection

You can save the settings and check the connection.

5. Save the settings and check the connection.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button.

After the settings are saved, the instrument automatically starts checking the

connection. When the operation is ﬁnished, the results are displayed on the

screen.

6. Return to the Internet Settings screen.

Press the B [– (NO)], B [+ (YES)], or [EXIT] button.

7. Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs,

see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70.

Using a Cable Connection (Using Static IP Address,

Proxy Server) / Using a Wireless LAN (Using Static IP

Address, Proxy Server)

Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using

the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122.

2. Connect the devices according to the example.

For information on connecting the devices, refer to the website:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

3. Connect the instrument to the Internet.

Yo u’ll need to make Internet settings on the instrument explained in the section

“About the Internet Settings” below.

Making the Internet settings might take some time.

Make sure to save any settings you

have made or changed. Turning off

the instrument before saving may

result in loss of data.

CAUTION

NO YES

Wireless Execute?-->

Save&ConnectTest

NO YES

ConnectSucceeded OK-->

Save the Settings and Check the Connection screen

This instrument has two USB [TO

DEVICE] terminals; however, both

cannot be used at the same time.

Use the [SELECT] switch on the left

of the panel to select the desired

terminal. If you connect USB

storage devices to both USB [TO

DEVICE] terminals, the devices

may not operate properly.

TIP

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

When you use Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the ﬁrst time, you should make the

Internet settings according to the following illustration ﬂow. This ﬂow is shown to make

you easily understand how to load the setting ﬁle created on the computer to your

instrument. You won’t need to make any settings on your instrument.

For details, refer to the Yamaha webpage:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

Creating the Internet Setting File

Procedure

1. Create the Internet Setting File.

You need to create the Internet setting ﬁle on the special Yamaha webpage using

your computer. For information about how to create the ﬁle, read the instructions

on the Yamaha webpage:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

About the Internet Settings

You do not need to make Internet

settings here if you are using a

cable connection (using DHCP), a

wireless LAN (using a wireless

game adaptor; using DHCP), or a

wireless LAN (using a USB wireless

LAN adaptor; using DHCP).

TIP

Special Yamaha

website

Create the Internet

setting ﬁle

Load the ﬁle to the

instrument

Save the ﬁle to USB

storage device

USB Storage

Device

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Loading the Internet Setting Files

This procedure lets you make Internet settings by loading the ﬁles created on the special

Yamaha webpage to the instrument.

2. Call up the Internet Settings screen.

Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC]

button.

3. Engage the Load mode.

Make sure that the USB storage device containing the saved Internet

setting ﬁle named “conﬁg.n21” is connected to the instrument, and then

use the A [–][+] buttons.

4. Start loading.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to call up the conﬁrmation message

(“Sure?-->”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears

and data loading starts. When loading is complete, a “Completed” message

appears for three seconds, followed by the Check the Connection screen. Please

proceed to “Checking the Connection” on page 60.

To cancel the loading, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)]

button.

NO YES

Wireless Execute?-->

NetworkSearch

Internet Settings screen

NO YES

ConfigFile Execute?-->

Import

You can create the Internet setting

ﬁles (named “conﬁg.n21”) on the

special Yamaha webpage.

Yamaha recommends that you

back up the Internet setting ﬁles

(page 103).

TIP

NO YES

ConfigFile Sure?-->

Import

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Checking the Connection

5. Check the connection.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button.

6. Return to the Internet Settings screen.

Press the B [– (NO)], B [+ (YES)], or [EXIT] button.

7. Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs,

see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70.

NO YES

ConfigFile Execute?-->

ConnectTest

NO YES

ConnectSucceeded OK-->

Check the Connection screen

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

This lets you conﬁrm LAN connection environment, IP address acquisition status, Time acquisition status, and the ﬁeld

strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor; using DHCP) for the current connection.

Procedure

1. Call up the Connection Information screen.

1-1 Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press

the [REC] button.

1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons.

If “Display” does not appear in the lower left of the screen, use the C [–][+]

buttons to call up “Display.”

2. Call up the connection information.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button.

The connection information is not displayed, depending on the state of the connection, and

is indicated as “NoInfo.”

Calling Up the Connection Information

1-1

1-2

1-1

NO YES

Wireless Execute?-->

NetworkSearch

NO YES

ConnectInf Execute?-->

Display

Connection Information screen

NO YES

ConnectInf Execute?-->

Display:Device=OK(Port)

If the connection information

extends beyond what can be

displayed in the screen, you can

press the D [+] button to move

toward the right in one-character

steps. Press the D [–] button to

move back to the left in one-

character steps.

TIP

Indication Meaning

Device = LAN connection environment

IP = IP address acquisition status

Time = Time acquisition status

Strength = Field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor;

using DHCP)

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

This procedure lets you export the detailed information on the current connection as a text ﬁle to a USB ﬂash storage

device. You can check the information on your computer.

Procedure

1. Call up the screen below.

Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC]

button.

2. Turn on the Export mode.

Make sure that a USB ﬂash storage device is connected to the

instrument, and then press the A [–][+] button.

If the “Export” does not appear in the lower left of the screen, press the C [–][+]

buttons to call up “Export.”

3. Start exporting.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button.

Overwriting the Connection Information

A “Overwrite?-->” message will appear on the display if a USB storage device

contains a ﬁle with the same name as the one you exported before. To overwrite,

press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the

Clavinova overwrites the data. When overwriting is complete, a “Completed”

message appears for three seconds, before returning to the previous screen.

To cancel overwriting, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)]

button.

Exporting the Connection Information

The connection information ﬁle

does not allow you to manually

make Internet settings (pages 53

and 57). The connection

information ﬁle is set to “read only”

and cannot be edited.

TIP

NO YES

Wireless Execute?-->

NetworkSearch

NO YES

ConnectInf Execute?-->

Export

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

After exporting, connect the USB storage device to your computer, and then open

the text ﬁle “ConnectionInfo.txt” in the root directory of the USB storage device

to check the detailed connection information.

Turn on the power while simultaneously holding down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button and [PLAY/PAUSE] button

to restore the Internet settings to default settings.

CAUTION

Restoring the instrument resets all Internet settings to the original factory-programmed settings.

Yamaha recommends you that you back up your Internet settings before restoring. See “Backing up

the Clavinova’s internal data [FullBackup] on page 103 for details.

Internet Normal (Default) Settings List

NO YES

ConnectInf Overwrite?-->

Export

NO YES

ConnectInf Completed

Export

Restoring the Internet Settings to Normal (Default) Settings

NO YES

FactorySet Executing

InternetSetting

The Internet settings are not

restored to the default settings

when using the “Restoring the

normal (default) settings” operation

on page 102.

Information contained in the

cookies will be restored at the

same time.

TIP

DHCP ON (available)

Wireless LAN OFF (no settings)

Proxy server OFF (no settings)

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message List (IDC)

Message Meaning

Execution of the operation failed because the recorded data has not been saved. Save the data

by following the instructions “Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save]” on

page 42.

Currently checking whether the USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the musical

instrument is compatible or not.

This might take about 5 minutes. Please wait for a while.

An error in communication with the Internet occurred.

Conﬁrm whether the connection is correct by “Connecting the Instrument to the Internet”

on page 51.

* For detailed information on the error, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66.

A communication timeout occurred.

If this message appears repeatedly, the communication may be unreliable. Make sure that

your communication environment is appropriate.

The connection test of the instrument to the Internet has failed.

Conﬁrm whether the connection is correct by “Connecting the Instrument to the Internet”

on page 51.

* For detailed information on the error, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66.

Currently connecting to the Internet by a USB wireless LAN adaptor whose compatibility

has not been conﬁrmed.

The instrument could not be successfully connected to the Internet.

Conﬁrm whether the connection is correct by referring to “Connecting the Instrument to

the Internet” on page 51.

* For detailed information on the error, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66.

The connection test of the instrument to the Internet has succeeded.

An error occurred.

Check the error code number in the display and refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on

page 66 for an explanation.

The particular USB wireless LAN adaptor which is connected to the instrument is invalid.

Use a USB wireless LAN adaptor whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha

(page 122).

This message is displayed when the WEP key input is incorrect.

Re-input the correct WEP key.

The USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument.

•Conﬁrm whether the connection of the USB wireless LAN adaptor to the instrument is

correct.

•Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal (page 123).

The particular USB wireless LAN adaptor which is connected to the instrument is

unsupported.

CannotOperate Exit-->

CheckingLANadaptor

Communication Exit-->

Error (xxxx)

Communication Exit-->

Timeout (xxxx)

ConnectError Exit-->

(xxxx)

Connecting

UnknownLANadaptor

ConnectionError Exit-->

(xxxx)

ConnectSucceeded OK-->

ErrorOccurred Exit-->

(xxxx)

Invalid Exit-->

LANadaptor

InvalidWEPkey

NoWirelessAdaptor

UnknownLANadaptor OK-->

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The characters “(xxxx)” indicate the relevant error code. For detailed information on speciﬁc error codes, refer to the “Error Code List

(IDC)” on page 66.

This message appears if the wireless network has not been found.

• Please check that the power of the access point is turned on and that the settings of the

device are correct.

•Set the instrument within reach of the signal from the access point. The signal will not be

received if the distance from the access point is too great or there is an obstacle blocking

reception.

Message Meaning

WirelessNetwork

NotFound

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Error Code List (IDC)

Error Code Meaning

1110 USB wireless LAN adaptor, LAN cable, or router cannot be recognized.

Please check whether a USB wireless LAN adaptor, LAN cable, or router has been correctly connected. Also

check that you are not using a damaged cable.

1120 The USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the musical instrument does not function

properly.

Make sure to use a USB wireless LAN adaptor whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha

(page 53).

1130 Communication with the access point has failed.

• Please check that all settings of the wireless LAN are correct.

• Please check that the power of the access point is turned on and that the settings of the device are correct.

•Set the instrument within reach of the signal from the access point. The signal will not be received if the

distance from the access point is too great or there is an obstacle blocking reception.

1250 – 1252 IP address could not be obtained from the router.

•(When using a cable LAN connection:) Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected and that the cable

you are using is not damaged.

•(When using a wireless LAN connection:) Check that all settings for the wireless LAN are correct.

•Make sure that the power of the router is turned on. Also, conﬁrm that the router settings allows the use of

DHCP.

•Try turning on the power of the router once again.

1410 – 1415 Connection to the special website has failed.

•Make sure that the power of the router is turned on. Also, conﬁrm that the router settings are correct.

•(When using a ﬁxed IP address, proxy server:) Check that all LAN settings are correct.

•Try turning on the power of the router once again.

2001 Communication error.

Check the communication environment. Try connecting again after a while.

2042 Communication timeout occurred.

•Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected and that the cable you are using is not damaged.

•Make sure that the power of the router is turned on. Also, conﬁrm that the router settings are correct.

•Try turning on the router again.

2404 Server was not found.

Tr y again after a while.

3001 File access error.

3002 File cannot be read.

3003 Data cannot be written to the ﬁle.

3004 There is not enough available memory in the media.

3011 There is not enough space in the assigned folder.

3019 This media has not been formatted.

Format the media after making sure that there is no important data remaining. Please be careful that all data

will be deleted when executing the format.

3020 Write-protect has been enabled for the media.

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Glossary of Terms (IDC)

Access point

A device that acts as a communication hub for multiple wireless devices, and conventionally enables

both wired and wireless LAN connections.

Broadband

An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical ﬁber) that allows for high-

speed, high-volume data communication.

Browser

The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the

display that shows the contents of the web pages.

A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using

the Internet. The function is similar to a preference ﬁle in a conventional computer program, in that

it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-

enter the information each time you visit the site.

DHCP

This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network conﬁguration

information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the

Internet.

Download

Tr ansferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive

or other local storage device—much like copying ﬁles from your hard disk drive to a ﬂoppy disk. For

this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the

instrument.

Home page

The ﬁrst page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also

used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.

Internet

A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among

computers, mobile phones and other devices.

IP address

A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s

location on the network.

LAN

Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at

a single location (such as an ofﬁce or home) by means of a special cable.

Link

Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character

strings on a web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the

relevant link.

Modem

A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a

computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the

phone line, and vice versa.

Provider

A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the

Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider.

Proxy

A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing

information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can

fulﬁll the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to

improve performance and speed, and to ﬁlter requests, usually for security and to prevent

unauthorized access to an internal network.

Router

A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when

connecting several computers in a house or ofﬁce, and allow them to all access the Internet and share

data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have

a built-in router.

Server

A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to ﬁles and

services.

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Site

Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the

collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the

Yamaha site.

SSL

Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting conﬁdential data such as credit card

numbers over the Internet.

URL

Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to speciﬁc

websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”

Web page

Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.

WEP

Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, a security protocol for wireless networks.

WEP protects communication contents from being intercepted.

Wireless LAN

A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.

Wireless Game Adaptor

(Wireless Ethernet

Converter or Bridge)

Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and

game machines, etc. equipped with [LAN] ports.

Wireless network

Wireless network where signal is sent and received by using electric waves.

Internet Direct Connection (IDC)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Troubleshooting (IDC)

Problem Cause Solution

The instrument cannot connect

to the Internet using the [LAN]

port.

The LAN cable is not connected

securely to the [LAN] port.

Check the connection of the LAN cable to the

[LAN] port.

The LAN cable used for

connection may be damaged.

Use a new LAN cable.

The instrument cannot connect

to the Internet using a wireless

game adaptor.

The settings of the wireless

game adaptor are incorrect.

The settings of the wireless game adaptor

cannot be made on the instrument. For

information about how to make settings, read

the owner’s manual for the particular wireless

game adaptor you are using.

The USB wireless LAN adaptor

is not recognized by the

instrument.

The particular USB wireless LAN

adaptor you are using is not

compatible with the instrument.

Check the list of USB wireless LAN adaptors

whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by

Yamaha (page 122).

The desired USB [TO DEVICE]

terminal has not been selected.

This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE]

terminals; one on the left of the panel and one

on the terminal at the front. Use the [SELECT]

switch to select the desired terminal

(page 123).

The instrument cannot connect

to the Internet using a static IP

address, proxy server.

The necessary Internet settings

have not been made.

Make Internet settings on the instrument as

explained in the section “About the Internet

Settings” on page 58.

The instrument cannot connect

to the Internet using a wireless

LAN.

The access point is set to

conceal the SSID.

Temporarily remove the setting that conceals

SSID, and make the appropriate Internet

settings.

The access point is set to ﬁlter

the MAC address.

(When using a USB Wireless LAN Adaptor:)

LAN adaptor you are using in the access point.

(When using a Wireless Game Adaptor:) For

information about the MAC address that is

registered, refer to the owner’s manual for the

wireless game adaptor you are using.

The access point is set for

encryption in a format other than

WEP.

This instrument is encrypted in WEP format

only.

No signal from the access point

to the instrument is received.

Set the instrument within reach of the signal

from the access point. The signal will not be

received if the distance from the access point

is too great or there is an obstacle blocking

reception.

The WEP key has been entered

incorrectly (e.g., incorrect use of

uppercase and lowercase

letters).

After conﬁrming the characters of the WEP key,

including uppercase and lowercase letters,

enter it again.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to the Songs on Internet

Yamaha provides a special website with a data service that enables you to play back a

range of songs (song data) in various musical genres on your instrument.

For the latest services, refer to the Yamaha website:

http://music.yamaha.com/idc/

Before connect the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read “Internet Direct

Connection (IDC)” on page 51.

Procedure

1. Display the Song Select screen.

1-1 Make sure that the instrument is connected to the

Internet, then press the [SONG SELECT] button.

1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select “INTERNET.”

The folder name in the Internet is displayed on the screen.

Internet:

The Internet can be used by the instrument to play back a wide range of songs

(song data) in various musical genres.

Change the Clavinova’s character

type (“CharacterCode”) as

appropriate for the selected song

(page 47).

TIP

1-1

1-2

43 2 5

NO YES

INTERNET Connecting

NO YES

INTERNET BAR---

I-DIR:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx /

The number of measures

Folder name

Listening to the Songs on Internet

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

2. Select a song.

2-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a folder.

Press the D [+] button to open the folder and press the D [–] button to return to

the previous (upper) level.

2-2 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a desired Internet song.

3. Start playback.

Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

4. Stop playback.

Press the [STOP] button.

5. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

The Sync Start (page 21), Part

settings on/off (page 21), and A-B

repeat (page 22) become effective

only after you play back the song

once.

TIP

NO YES

INTERNET BAR001

I-001:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx /

Song name

If the song name extends beyond

what can be displayed in the

screen, you can press the D [+]

button to move toward the right in

steps of one character. Press the

D [–] button to move back to the

left in steps of one character.

You can play the keyboard along

with the Internet song playback.

You can change the voice playing

on the keyboard.

You might not be able to adjust the

tempo of songs from the Internet. In

such cases, the default tempo “---”

is automatically selected.

Song data from the Internet is not

transmitted via the MIDI

connectors.

TIP

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connections

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or

off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur.

1 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal (A/B)

This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices.

Refer to “Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 74.

2 USB [TO HOST] terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a

personal computer” on page 75 for more information.

3 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] terminals

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is.

4 [AUX PEDAL] jack

A separately sold FC7 foot controller or FC4/FC5 foot switch can be connected to this

jack. By using an FC7 you can control the volume while playing to add expression to your

performance, or control various other functions. By using an FC4/FC5, you can switch

various selected functions on/off. To select the function that will be controlled, use the

[FUNCTION] parameter [AuxPedalFunc] (page 97). The [PLAY/PAUSE] function can

also be assigned to a foot switch (page 98).

Connectors

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

1 2 4 75 63

On the left of

the panel

At front

There are two different types of

USB terminals on the instrument:

USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO

HOST]. Take care not to confuse

the two terminals and the

corresponding cable connectors.

Be careful to connect the proper

plug in the proper direction.

MIDI performance data and

commands are transferred in the

form of numeric values.

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received varies

depending on the type of MIDI

device, check the “MIDI

Implementation Chart” to ﬁnd out

what MIDI data and commands

your devices can transmit or

receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI

Implementation Chart is available

for downloading from the Yamaha

Manual Library.

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

TIP

Connect or disconnect the pedal

when the power is off.

CAUTION

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data

transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands

between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a

connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a

connected MIDI device or computer.

Connections

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

5 AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing

the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer

to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst turn on the power to

the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

6 AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks

These jacks let you connect the Clavinova to external powered speaker systems, for

playing in larger venues at higher volumes.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external system, ﬁrst turn on the power to

the Clavinova, then to the external system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting will affect the sound that is output from

AUX OUT jacks. When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external

speaker and you want to turn off the speaker sound of the Clavinova, switch the speaker

off (page 99). Moreover, the tone quality of the instrument sound output from the

speakers and the headphones changes automatically to the appropriate settings according

to how the instrument is being used (see chart below).

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] dial setting affects the

input signal from the AUX IN jacks,

but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT]

(page 25) settings do not.

If you connect the Clavinova to a

monaural device, use only the AUX

IN [L/L+R] jack.

Use audio cables and adaptor

plugs with no resistance.

TIP

Clavinova

AUX IN

AUX OUT

Tone Generator

Phone plug (standard)

Audio cable

Plug shape depends

on the device.

When the sound from the AUX OUT

jacks is routed to the AUX IN jacks,

the input sound will be output from

the speaker of the CLP. The output

sound may be excessively loud

and may cause noise.

If you connect the Clavinova to a

monaural device, use only the AUX

OUT [L/L+R] jack.

TIP

Clavinova

AUX INAUX OUT

Phone plug

(standard)

Cable

Phone plug

(standard)

Powered speaker

No plugs to connected to AUX OUT jacks Plugs connected to AUX OUT jacks

Speakers On

Speakers Normal

(Headphones Switch)

Speakers Off Speakers On

Speakers Normal

(Headphones Switch)

Speakers Off

Headphones

connected

Optimum equalization

for speakers applied

Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat

Headphones

not connected

Optimum equalization

for speakers applied

Optimum equalization

for speakers applied

Flat Flat Flat Flat

Speakers sound

Speakers do not sound

Connections

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

7 [LAN] port

This port allows direct connection of the CLP-380 to the Internet, letting you use a

special service on the Yamaha website for playing back songs in a variety of musical

genres as background music on the instrument. Before connecting the instrument to the

Internet, be sure to read the section “Internet Direct Connection (IDC)” on page 51.

To connect to a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal”

on page 122.

To display the data in the USB storage device

To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG

SELECT] button and select a USB storage device with the A [–][+] buttons to engage the

Song Selection mode, or press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to engage the File/

Song Setting mode. If you try to engage these modes before connecting the USB storage

device, press the [EXIT] button to exit the mode and re-engage the mode.

Connecting to a USB storage device

Backing up your data to a computer

■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk

of your computer, then archive and organize the ﬁles as desired. Simply reconnect the

device as shown below.

Instrument

Computer

USB storage

device

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Saves internal data to a USB storage device.

USB storage device

Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it

to the computer.

Backing up data to a computer and organizing ﬁles/folders.

Connections

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

By connecting a computer to the USB [TO HOST] or MIDI terminals, you can transfer data between the instrument and

the computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music software. Keep in mind that you also need

to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver.

There are the two methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:

1. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST]

terminal (see below)

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals (page 76)

If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recommend that you connect the

computer and the instrument by USB, rather than by MIDI.

For more information, refer to the following pages.

CAUTION

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power of the Clavinova and

quit any application software that is open on the computer before connecting any cables. After

making connections, turn on the power to the Clavinova.

CAUTION

If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect

the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left

connected.

■ Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to a USB

storage device

Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the

instrument by ﬁrst copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting

the media to the instrument.

Not only ﬁles created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI ﬁles created

on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the

computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument.

Instrument

USB storage

device

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device from the instrument.

Computer

USB storage device

Copying the ﬁles of the hard disk of the computer to the

USB storage device.

Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it

to the instrument.

Connecting a personal computer

Driver:

A driver is software that provides a

data-transfer interface between the

computer’s operating system and a

connected hardware device. You

need to install a USB MIDI driver to

connect the computer and the

instrument.

TERMINOLOGY

Connections

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Connecting the USB port on the computer to the

Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal

Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST]

terminal on the Clavinova.

Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI

terminals

Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI

cables.

USB [TO HOST] terminal

Instrument

USB cable

Computer

• The instrument will begin

transmission a short time after the

USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to

connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connection

directly without passing through a

USB hub.

• For information on setting up your

sequence software, refer to the

owner’s manual of the relevant

software.

TIP

Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to

observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and

corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the

application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then

on again.

CAUTION

•Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

•Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any

power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby).

•Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB

[TO HOST] terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or

plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal.

- Quit any open application software on the computer.

-Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is

transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)

•While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds

or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument

off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

Instrument

MIDI interface

Computer

USB port or serial port

(modem or printer terminal)

MIDI cable

MIDI [IN] terminal

MIDI [OUT]

terminal

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as recording and playback, metronome,

Vo ices, iAFC, etc. For basic procedure on making these settings, refer to page 80.

Recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

Metronome [METRONOME SETTING]

Parameter List

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 42

Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a

USB storage device

Delete 43

Renaming ﬁles Rename 43

Copying ﬁles Copy 44

Moving ﬁles Move 45

Making folders in the USB storage device MakeDir 45

Formatting a USB storage device Format 46

Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 46

Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 47

Playing back a song/all songs repeatedly SongRepeat 82

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed by the phrase number PhraseMark 82

Correcting note timing Quantize 83

Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the

ﬁrst voicing

QuickPlay 83

Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 84

Deleting data from each channel ChannelClear 84

Selecting a record starting method RecStart 33

Selecting a record ending method RecEnd 33

Recording parts 3 – 16 (Extra Parts) RecExtraPartsCh 35

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Setting the metronome time signature TimeSignature 85

Setting the metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 85

Setting the metronome voice MetronomeSound 85

Detailed Settings

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “ ” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Setting the octave* Octave 87

Setting the volume level* Volume 87

Setting the position of right and left channels* Pan 87

Make ﬁne adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) Detune 87

Selecting the reverb type ReverbType 88

Setting the reverb depth* ReverbSend 88

Selecting the chorus type ChorusType 88

Setting the chorus depth* ChorusSend 88

Setting the chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 89

Selecting the DSP type* DSP Type (DSP) 89

Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* VibeRotorSpeed 89

Tur ning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* VibeRotorOnOff

(RotorOnOff)

Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* RotarySpeed

(Rot.Speed)

Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* DSPDepth 90

Adjusting the brightness of the sound* Brightness 90

Adjusting the resonance effect* HarmonicContent

(Harmonic)

Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ LowFreq.

(EQ L.Freq)

Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer*

EQ LowGain 91

Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ HighFreq.

(EQ H.Freq)

Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer*

EQ HighGain 91

Setting the touch sensitivity* TouchSense 91

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Tur ning iAFC on/off iAFC 92

Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect depth DynDmpFX Depth 92

Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth SpatialFX Depth 93

Calibration (automatic adjustment) Calibration 93

Restoring the default calibration setting iAFC Default 93

Detailed Settings

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Changing the key Transpose 94

Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 94

Fine tuning the pitch Tune 95

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 95

Selecting a scale Scale 95

Specifying the Split Point SplitPoint 96

Setting the right pedal function RPedalFunc 96

Setting the center pedal function CPedalFunc 96

Setting the left pedal function LPedalFunc 96

Setting the auxiliary pedal function AuxPedalFunc 97

Tur ning the right pedal function on/off RPedalOnOff 97

Tur ning the center pedal function on/off CPedalOnOff 97

Tur ning the left pedal function on/off LPedalOnOff 97

Tur ning the auxiliary pedal function on/off AuxPedalOnOff 98

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal PedalPlay/Pause 98

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 98

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the

sound

HalfPedalPoint 98

Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal SoftPedalDepth 98

Setting the depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 99

Setting the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 99

Specifying the volume of the key-off sound KeyOffSamplingDepth 99

Setting the range of pitch bend PitchBendRange 99

Switching the speaker on/off Speaker 99

Setting the MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 100

Setting the MIDI receive channel MidiInChannel 100

Tur ning local control on/off LocalControl 100

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI

transmission

MidiOutSelect 101

Selecting a type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 101

Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 101

Transmitting the initial settings on the panel InitialSetup 101

Selecting items saved at shutdown MemoryBackup 102

Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 102

Backing up the Clavinova’s internal data FullBackup 103

Displaying the version number Version 103

Detailed Settings

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Procedure

1. Access a setting menu.

Press the desired setting button ([FILE/SONG SETTING],

METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [iAFC SETTING], or

[FUNCTION]) to access the corresponding setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.

2. Select the desired parameter or part.

Press the setting button, A [–][+], and/or C [–][+] buttons repeatedly as

required.

3. Set the parameter or part.

Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)]

[+ (YES)], C [–][+], and D [–][+] buttons to select or set the option.

To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

4. Write, execute, or save the data.

There are two ways to respond to the messages.

If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display conﬁrmation (“Sure?→”). To proceed,

press the B [+ (YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes

the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three

seconds, then returns to the previous screen.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)]

button.

When “Overwrite?→” appears after the “Completed” message, press the B [+

(YES)] button.

Making detailed settings

12 3

3 4

NO YES

Quantize Execute?-->

Strength=100% 1/4

Detailed Settings

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

If “Set?→” appears:

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays

“Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays

“Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen.

5. Close the setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for recording and

playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PRESET”), memory

songs (“MEMORY”), or External songs (“USB1”) (see page 48).

Procedure

Select the desired song and press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to access the “File/Song

Setting” menu.

You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song

selected from the 50 preset songs or from the USB storage

devices.

When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song

you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat

playback of the speciﬁed songs until you press the [STOP]

button.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

[USBSongs] ...........All songs in the media inserted in the USB

storage device

[MemorySongs] .....All songs in the Clavinova’s memory

[USB+Memory] ......All songs from “USBSongs” and

“MemorySongs”

[PresetSongs] ........All 50 preset songs

[ALL] ......................All songs from “USBSongs,”

“MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs”

[OneSong] .............One song selected from the front panel

When several USB storage devices are connected, the device which

contains the previously selected song is the destination device.

If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk,

such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG

for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers in the

score to play back from the score from the mark point, or

to play back the phrase repeatedly.

If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”

selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated

playback of the speciﬁed phrase until you press the

[STOP] button.

If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts without

repeat.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range of the phrase number:

--- (not speciﬁed)

0 – the last phrase number of the song

If you select any song other than those from the “Disk Orchestra

Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.”

For information on the settings “Save” – “CharacterCode,” see “Handling ﬁles such as

deleting song ﬁles ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 39.

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button

Playing back a song/all songs

repeatedly

[SongRepeat]

NO YES

SongRepeat Off

USBSongs

Select on or off.

Specify the repeated songs.

TIP

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed by

the phrase number

[PhraseMark]

NO YES

PhraseMark RepeatOff

001

Select repeat on or off.

Specify the phrase number.

TIP

Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can

adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes.

Changes are made by song.

See the procedure on page 80.

Notes for which you can adjust the timing:

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are

exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize

two different note values at the same time. For example,

when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are

contained in the same part, if you quantize by the straight

eighth notes, all notes in the part are quantized to straight

eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel.

However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet

setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be

quantized correctly.

From this display, you can determine how strongly the

notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact

timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be

moved toward the speciﬁed quantization beats according

to the speciﬁed percentage. Applying less than 100%

quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel

in the recording.

Setting range:

0% – 100%

This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that

starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence

prior to the ﬁrst note, should be played from the ﬁrst note

or from the top of the bar (rest or blank).

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

[On] ....................... Playing from the ﬁrst note

[Off] ....................... Playing from the top of the bar (including a

rest or blank)

Correcting note timing

[Quantize]

NO YES

Quantize Execute?-->

Strength=100% 1/16

Stores the changed value.

Speciﬁes the type of note.

1/4.................

1/8.................

1/16...............

1/6.................

1/12...............

1/24...............

1/8+1/12...........

1/16+1/24.........

1/32...............

1/16+1/12.........

quarter note

quarter note triplet

eighth note

eighth note triplet

sixteenth note

sixteenth note triplet

thirty-second note

eighth note + eighth note triplet*

sixteenth note + eighth note triplet*

sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet*

Specifying whether playback starts

immediately along with the ﬁrst voicing

[QuickPlay]

Quarter-note length

Original data

Quantizing

strength=100

Quantizing

strength=50

NO YES

QuickPlay

Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can select a single channel to listen to its contents.

Playback starts from the ﬁrst note.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Ch1 – Ch16

The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned to a part,

so in this instrument, channel means the same as part.

Even channels that contain no data are displayed.

You can delete data from each of 16 channels.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Ch1 – Ch16, ALL (all channels)

The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned to a part,

so in this instrument, channel means the same as part.

Even channels that contain no data are displayed.

When you clear all channels using the “ALL” parameter, you can overwrite

the song. In this case, the ﬁle which contains song settings with no

channel data is saved.

Auditioning the channels

[ChannelListen]

NO YES

ChannelListen Start?-->

Ch1

Playback continues as long as you press

and hold down this button.

Select the desired channel for playback.

TIP

Deleting data from each channel

[ChannelClear]

NO YES

ChannelClear Execute?-->

Ch1

Delete data.

Select the desired channel for deletion.

TIP

For information on the settings “RecStart” and “RecEnd,” see “Re-recording a song

partially” on page 33.

For information on the setting “RecExtraPartsCh,” see “Recording a performance of several

different parts” on page 35.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the metronome

METRONOME [SETTING]

You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.

Procedure

Press the METRONOME [SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu.

See the procedure on page 80.

For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–][+] buttons to

select “3” and the D [–][+] buttons to select “4.”

Setting range for the numerator:

1 – 16

Setting options for the denominator:

2, 4, and 8

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

0 – 127

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

[BellOff] ................. Click (standard metronome sound)

[EnglishVoice]........ Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English

[GermanVoice] ...... Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German

[JapaneseVoice].... Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese

[FrenchVoice] ........ Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French

[SpanishVoice] ...... Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish

[BellOn] ................. Click and bell

To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”

METRONOME [SETTING] button

Setting the metronome time signature

[TimeSignature]

Setting the metronome volume level

[MetronomeVolume]

NO YES

TimeSignature

4/ 4

Set the numerator of

the time signature.

Set the denominator

of the time signature.

NO YES

MetronomeVolume

100

Selecting the metronome voice

[MetronomeSound]

NO YES

MetronomeSound

BellOff

TIP

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for the voices

[VOICE SETTING]

This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can

make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the

keyboard while changing the settings.

Procedure

1. Select a voice.

Select a voice referring to the section “Selecting and Playing Voices” on page 23.

2. Access the “Voice Setting” menu.

Press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu.

3. Press the A [–][+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the

voice.

The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.

[Main] ...................... MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)

[Main × Layer]......... MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode)

[Left]......................... LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)

[Left × Layer] ........... LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)

[VOICE SETTING] button

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or downward in

steps of an octave.

See the procedure on page 80.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

-2 (two octaves lower) – 0 (no pitch shift) – +2 (two octaves

higher)

You can set the volume level for each voice part.

See the procedure on page 80.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 – 127

You can specify the position in the stereo image from

which you hear the sound.

See the procedure on page 80.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

L64 (hard left) – C (center) – R63 (hard right)

The pitch of the two sounds selected in Dual mode can be

“skewed” slightly away from each other.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

-20 – +20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch of the ﬁrst

sound and lower the pitch of the second sound. Negative (–)

settings will do the opposite.)

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

Parameter names enclosed in parentheses ( ) are displayed in Dual mode.

Setting the octave

[Octave]*

Setting the volume level

[Volume]*

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Octave(GrndPno1) 0

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Volume 100

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Volume(GrndPno1) 100

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the position of right and left

channels

[Pan]*

Make ﬁne adjustments to the pitch

(only in Dual mode)

[Detune]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Pan C

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Pan(GrndPno1) C

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

Detune + 3

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.”

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Room......................Simulates reverberation in a room.

Hall1.......................Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.

Hall2.......................Reverberation is slightly longer than that of

“Hall1.”

Stage......................Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument

sound.

Plate .......................Reverberation simulating that created by

vibration of a metal plate.

The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.”

See the procedure on page 80.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 – 127

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.”

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Chorus ................... Adds a rich, spacious sound.

Celeste .................. Adds swell and a spacious sound.

Flanger .................. Adds swell effects of an ascending or

descending jet plane.

See the procedure on page 80.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 – 127

Setting the reverb type

[ReverbType]

Setting the reverb depth

[ReverbSend]*

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ReverbType Hall1

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ReverbSend 14

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

ReverbSend(E.Piano1) 26

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Selecting the chorus type

[Chorus Type]

Setting the chorus depth

[ChorusSend]*

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusType Chorus

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusSend 48

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

ChorusSend(E.Piano1) 72

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each

voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off setting

for the voice automatically changes according to this

parameter.

Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the

ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

On/Off

You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus).

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

DelayLCR...............Delay applied at left, center, and right

positions.

DelayLR .................Delay applied at left and right positions.

Echo.......................Echo-like delay

CrossDelay ............Left and right delays are crossed.

Symphonic .............Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.

Rotary.....................Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker.

Tremolo ..................The volume level changes in rapid cycles.

VibeRotor ...............The vibrato effect of a vibraphone.

AutoPan .................The sound pans left to right and back and

forth.

Phaser....................The phase changes periodically, swelling

the sound.

AutoWah.................The center frequency of the wah ﬁlter

changes periodically.

SoundBoard...........Simulates the reverberation of a piano

soundboard.

Off ..........................No effect.

Rotor= The rotating portion of an electrical device etc.

This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the

DSP Type parameter explained above.

This sets the speed of the vibrato effect that is applied

when you have selected Vibraphone and are using the

VibeRotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

1 – 10

This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the

DSP Type parameter explained above.

It turns on/off the vibrato effect that is applied when you

use the VibeRotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

On/Off

Setting the chorus on/off

[ChorusOnOff]

Selecting the DSP type*

[DSP Type (DSP)]

TIP

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusOnOff Off

NO YES

Main Set?-->

DSP Type DelayLCR

Setting the speed of the vibraphone

vibrato effect*

[VibeRotorSpeed]

Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect

on/off*

[VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)]

TERMINOLOGY

NO YES

Main Set?-->

VibeRotorSpeed 6

NO YES

Main Set?-->

VibeRotorOnOff On

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

This will be displayed only if Rotary is selected for the

DSP Type parameter explained above.

It sets the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Slow/Fast

This sets the depth of the DSP effect (page 89).

Some DSP Type settings do not allow you to set the

DSPDepth.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

1 (output only the original sound with almost no effect applied) –

127 (output only the sound processed by the effect)

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

-64 – +63

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

-64 – +63

Resonance can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, making the sound

brighter and harder.

Equalizer:

An audio equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into multiple regions

and enables the user to adjust the relative amplitude of each region.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

32 Hz – 2.0 kHz

Setting the rotation speed of the

rotary speaker*

[RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)]

Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect*

[DSPDepth]

Adjusting the brightness of the

sound*

[Brightness]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

RotarySpeed Slow

NO YES

Main Set?-->

DSPDepth 127

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Brightness 0

Adjusting the resonance effect*

[HarmonicContent (Harmonic)]

Adjusting the low-range frequency of

the equalizer*

[EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

HarmonicContent 0

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

High GainLow Gain

Low Freq.

High Freq.

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ LowFreq. 32

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

-12 – +12 dB

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

500 Hz – 16.0 kHz

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

-12 – +12 dB

This parameter enables determines the manner and

degree to which the volume level changes in response to

your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since

the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do

not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the

normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting

range below.)

See the procedure on page 80.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 (softest) – 64 (largest changes in the level) – 127 (loudest and

ﬁxed)

Adjusting the low-range gain (amount

of boost/cut) of the equalizer*

[EQ LowGain]

Adjusting the high-range frequency of

the equalizer*

[EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)]

Adjusting the high-range gain

(amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer*

[EQ HighGain]

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ LowGain 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ HighFreq. 500

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ HighGain 0

Setting the touch sensitivity

[TouchSense]*

NO YES

Main Set?-->

TouchSense 64

NO YES

MainxLayer Set?-->

TouchSense(GrndPno1) 64

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant, similar to an acoustic musical instruments.

This lets you experience the ambience and reverberation that are characteristic of performing on stage or simulates the

sustain sound that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano.

This section describes how to make various settings for the iAFC function. You can also perform an automatic adjustment

in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect.

Procedure

Press [iAFC SETTING] button to enter iAFC Setting mode.

iAFC cannot be used in the following cases.

When the Speaker setting is Normal, and headphones are connected.

When the Speaker setting is off.

When using iAFC, do not block the speaker located on the rear panel of the Clavinova. The optimal iAFC effect cannot be obtained if this speaker is

blocked.

iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Electronic Microphone Rotator) technology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

On/Off

Dynamic Damper Effect is one type of the iAFC effect.

Dynamic Damper Effect simulates the sustain sound that

occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand

piano. The internal microphones are not used, but the

sound produced within the Clavinova is processed to

create a spacious sensation, as you press the damper pedal

and play the keyboard.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

0 – 127

Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the

ﬁrst time, and after each time you move the Clavinova (page 93).

When the [iAFC SETTING] button is pressed before performing the automatic adjustment, the “Calibration” screen

will be displayed.

[iAFC SETTING] button

TIP

Turning iAFC on/off

[iAFC]

NO YES

iAFC

Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect

depth

[DynDmpFX Depth]

NO YES

DynDmpFX Depth

105

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Spatial Effect is one type of the iAFC effect. Spatial Effect

creates a sense of reverberation and spaciousness by

picking up the output sound using internal microphones

and output the sound from the speaker on the rear of the

instrument. The spread and spaciousness of the sound is

different depending on the depth. For lower depth

settings, this creates the resonance and enhances the

acoustic realism of the sound that is characteristic of

acoustic instruments by creating a virtual soundboard.

For deeper depth settings, the sound of the instrument

itself and the sound of singing and other instruments

played nearby is picked up by internal microphones, and

processed to simulate the spatial characteristics of

performing together on stage.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

0 – 127

This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of

iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect will be obtained.

When automatic adjust begins, a test sound (noise) will

sound for about ﬁve seconds.

While automatic adjustment is being performed, do not

make audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 80.

The keyboard will not produce sound while automatic adjustment is being

performed. Nor is it possible to adjust the volume of the Clavinova.

This sets the calibration function to the default setting.

See the procedure on page 80.

Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth

[SpatialFX Depth]

Calibration (automatic adjustment)

[Calibration]

NO YES

SpatialFX Depth

NO YES

Calibration Sure?-->

Test sound is output.

TIP

Restoring the default calibration

setting

[iAFC Default]

NO YES

iAFC Default Set?-->

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

Other settings [FUNCTION]

You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.

Procedure

Press the [FUNCTION] button to enter Function mode.

TRANSPOSE= To change the key

(Changing the key: To raise or lower the overall pitch of the entire song.)

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to

shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in

semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key

signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the

keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments.

For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,”

playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play

the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will

transpose it to the key of F.

Setting for:

Master ....................The sound of the entire instrument (the

manually-played sound and the song

playback)

Keyboard ...............The manually-played sound

Song.......................The song playback

Setting range:

-12 (-1 octave) – 0 (normal pitch) – +12 (+1 octave)

You can specify a touch response (how the sound

responds to the way you play the keys).

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Light....................... With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a

loud sound. The volume level of tones tends

to be consistent.

Medium.................. Standard touch response.

Heavy .................... You must hit the key very hard to generate a

loud volume. This allows for versatile

expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo

tones.

Fixed...................... No touch response. The volume level will be

the same regardless of how hard you play

the keys. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)]

buttons to set the volume level.

Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:

1 – 127

[FUNCTION] button

Changing the key

[Transpose]

TIP

NO YES

Transpose

Master 0

Selecting a touch response

[TouchResponse]

NO YES

TouchResponse Vel= 64

Fixed

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This

function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with

other instruments or CD music.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

A3 = 414.8 Hz – 466.8 Hz (0.2 Hz steps)

You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and

“GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve

of the piano voice does not quite match that of other

instruments voices.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Stretch....................Tuning curve particularly for pianos

Flat .........................Tuning curve in which the frequency is

octave doubled over the entire keyboard

range

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary

piano tuning scale. However, history has known

numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis

for certain genres of music. You can experience the

tunings of these genres.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Equal ..................... One octave is divided into twelve equal

intervals. Currently most popular piano

tuning scale.

PureMajor/PureMinor

............................... Based on natural overtones, three major

chords using these scales produce a

beautiful, pure sound.

Pythagorean .......... This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a

Greek philosopher, is based on the interval

of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells,

but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable

for some leads.

MeanTone .............. This scale is an improvement of the

Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has

been eliminated. It spread during the late

16th century through the late 18th century.

Handel used this scale.

Werckmeister/Kirnberger

............................... These scales combine Mean Tone and

Pythagorean in different ways. With these

scales, modulation changes the impression

and feel of the songs. They were often used

in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are

also often used now to reproduce the music

of that era on harpsichords.

Normal setting:

Equal

If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify

the root note using the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons.

Setting range:

C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B

Fine tuning the pitch

[Tune]

Selecting a tuning curve for a

piano

voice

[PianoTuningCurve]

NO YES

Tune

A3=440.0Hz

NO YES

PianoTuningCurve

Stretch

Selecting a scale

[Scale]

NO YES

Scale BaseNote=C

PureMajor

NO YES

Scale BaseNote=C

PureMajor

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can specify the split point (the boundary between the

right-hand and left-hand keyboard areas).

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

A -1 – C7

You can also use [SPLIT] to set the split point (page 29).

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Sustain ...................ON/OFF switch type damper

SustainCont............Damper that sustains the sound

proportionately to how deeply you press the

pedal

Sostenuto ...............Sostenuto (page 24)

Soft.........................Soft (page 24)

Expression .............A function that lets you create changes in

dynamics (volume) as you play

PitchBend Up.........A function that smoothly raises the pitch

PitchBend Down

......A function that smoothly lowers the pitch

RotarySpeed ..........Change the rotational speed of the

JazzOrgan rotary speaker (switch between

fast/slow each time you press the pedal)

VibeRotor ...............Switch the vibraphone vibrato on/off (switch

on/off each time you press the pedal)

Normal setting:

SustainCont

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except for the

following parameters.

• SustainCont

• Expression

• PitchBend Up

• PitchBend Down

Normal Setting:

Sostenuto

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except for the

following parameters.

• SustainCont

• Expression

• PitchBend Up

• PitchBend Down

Normal Setting:

Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan, MellowOrgan and

VibraPhone), Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan and MellowOrgan),

Vibraphone (VibeRotor)

Specifying the Split Point

[Split Point]

Setting the right pedal function

[RPedalFunc]

NO YES

SplitPoint

F#2

TIP

NO YES

RPedalFunc Set?-->

SustainCont

Setting the center pedal function

[CPedalFunc]

Setting the left pedal function

[LPedalFunc]

NO YES

CPedalFunc Set?-->

Sostenuto

NO YES

LPedalFunc Set?-->

Soft

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the

Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Same as “Right pedal function assignment” (page 96).

Normal setting:

Expression

Yamaha FC7 foot controller

This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, or

PitchBend Up/Down.

Yamaha FC4 foot switch

Yamaha FC5 foot switch

These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft,

RotarySpeed, or VibeRotor.

This turns the right pedal function on or off for the

relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the

desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and

determine whether the right pedal function (set on

page 96) will affect that part or not.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

This turns the center pedal function on or off for the

relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the

desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and

determine whether the center pedal function (set on

page 96) will affect that part or not.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

This turns the left pedal function on or off for the

relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the

desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and

determine whether the left pedal function (set on

page 96) will affect that part or not.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

Setting the auxiliary pedal function

[AuxPedalFunc]

Turning the right pedal function on/off

[RPedalOnOff]

NO YES

AuxPedalFunc Set?-->

Expression

TIP

NO YES

RPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the right pedal on/off setting is

to be changed.

Turning the center pedal function on/off

[CPedalOnOff]

Turning the left pedal function on/off

[LPedalOnOff]

NO YES

CPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the center pedal on/off setting

is to be changed.

NO YES

LPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.Select the voice part for which

the left pedal on/off setting is

to be changed.

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

This turns the auxiliary pedal function on or off for the

relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the

desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and

determine whether the auxiliary pedal function (set on

page 97) will affect that part or not.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal Setting:

Different for each voice.

If you assign the SONG PLAY/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the

function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Function

menu (pages 96 and 97) is disabled.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Left, Center, AUX

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

Off for all pedals

A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] jack may switch

on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on

the effects and others turn them off when you press them.

Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Make, Break

Here you can specify the point to which you must depress

the pedal (right and AUX) before the assigned effect

begins to be applied. This setting applies only to the

“SustainCont” effect (page 96) that is assigned to the

right or AUX pedal.

Setting range:

-2 (effective with the shallowest press) – 0 – +2 (effective with the

deepest press)

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

1 – 10

Turning the auxiliary pedal function

on/off

[AuxPedalOnOff]

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE]

function to the pedal

[PedalPlay/Pause]

NO YES

AuxPedalOnOff Set?-->

Main On

Select on or off.

Select the voice part for which

the AUX pedal on/off setting is

to be changed.

TIP

NO YES

PedalPlay/Pause

Center Off

Select a pedal to assign

the function

Select on or off.

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal

[AuxPedalType]

Setting the point at which the damper

pedal starts to affect the sound

[HalfPedalPoint]

Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal

[SoftPedalDepth]

NO YES

AuxPedalType

Make

NO YES

HalfPedalPoint

NO YES

SoftPedalDepth

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

Detailed Settings

This parameter is effective on the voices, such as “Grand

Piano 1.”

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Off, 1 – 10

This parameter is effective only on the voice group

“GRANDPIANO1.”

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Off, 1 – 10

You can adjust the volume of the key-off sound (the

subtle sound that occurs when you release a key)

This is effective on the voice groups “Grand Piano1,”

“Harpsichord,” and “E.Clavichord” and on the voice

“E.Piano2.”

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Off, 1 – 10

This speciﬁes the amount of change that can be produced

by the pitch bend function which smoothly varies the

pitch.

This setting applies only to the manually-played sound.

This setting can be made in semitone steps.

You can set the pedal function (page 96) to specify

whether the pitch will be raised or lowered.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

0 – +12 (Pressing the pedal will raise/lower the pitch by 12

semitones [1 octave])

Normal setting:

This setting lets you switch the speaker on/off.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Normal (HeadphoneSW) .... The speaker will sound only if

headphones are not connected.

On....................................... The speaker will always sound.

Off....................................... The speaker will not sound.

Setting the depth of string resonance

[StringResonanceDepth]

Setting the depth of sustain sampling

for the damper pedal

[SustainSamplingDepth]

Specifying the volume of the key-off

sound

[KeyOffSamplingDepth]

NO YES

StringResonanceDepth

NO YES

SustainSamplingDepth

NO YES

KeyOffSamplingDepth

Setting the range of pitch bend

[PitchBendRange]

Switching the speaker on/off

[Speaker]

NO YES

PitchBendRange

NO YES

Speaker

Normal(HeadphoneSW)

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

100

Detailed Settings

This parameter enables you to specify the channel on

which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer

Setting range:

Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)

Normal setting:

Main ......................Midi/Usb1 Ch1

Left ........................Midi/Usb1 Ch2

Layer .....................Midi/Usb1 Ch3

Left Layer ..............Midi/Usb1 Ch4

You can specify whether each channel of data from MIDI

[IN] and USB [TO HOST] will be received.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16

Usb2 Ch1 – 16

Setting range:

Song, Main, Left, Layer, LeftLayer, Keyboard, Off

Normal setting:

Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16........Song

Usb2 Ch1............................Keyboard

Usb2 Ch2............................Main

Usb2 Ch3............................Left

Usb2 Ch4............................Layer

Usb2 Ch5............................LeftLayer

Others .................................Off

“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova

produces the sound from its tone generator when you

play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off” state, the

keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each

other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the

Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the

keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a

connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound.

The “Local Control Off” setting is useful when you wish

to play an external sound source while playing the keys on

the Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

Setting the MIDI transmit channel

[MidiOutChannel]

Setting the MIDI receive channel

[MidiInChannel]

NO YES

MidiOutChannel

Main Midi/Usb1Ch1

Select a voice part. Specify the channel.

NO YES

MidiInChannel

Midi/Usb1Ch1 Song

Select a channel Select a MIDI receive part

Turning Local control on/off

[LocalControl]

USB TO HOST

MIDI IN

Midi/Usb1

Ch1 – Ch16

Usb2

Ch1 – Ch16

Keyboard

– LeftLayer

Song

NO YES

LocalControl

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

101

Detailed Settings

You can select whether your performance data or song

playback data is sent via MIDI.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting range:

Keyboard ...............performance data played on the keyboard

Song.......................song playback data

Normal setting:

Keyboard

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data

the Clavinova can receive.

See the procedure on page 80.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data

the Clavinova can transmit.

See the procedure on page 80.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx

(System Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection,

to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance

data to a sequencer, it is useful if you ﬁrst send and record

(at the beginning of the performance data) the panel

setup data for your performance during playback.

See the procedure on page 80.

Selecting performance from the

keyboard or song data for MIDI

transmission

[MidiOutSelect]

Selecting a type of data received via

MIDI

[ReceiveParameter]

NO YES

MidiOutSelect

Keyboard

NO YES

ReceiveParameter

Note On

Select a type of data. Select on or off.

Selecting a type of data transmitted

via MIDI

[TransmitParameter]

Transmitting the initial settings on the

panel

[InitialSetup]

NO YES

TransmitParameter

Note On

Select a type of data. Select on or off.

NO YES

InitialSetup Start?-->

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

102

Detailed Settings

You can back up some settings, such as voice selection

and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after

you turn off the power to the Clavinova.

Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the

backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the

“CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 47) are always

backed up.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

Transpose

Brilliance

ReverbOnOff

iAfc

SplitPoint

Main/LeftVoice

MetronomeSetting

File/SongSetting

MidiSetting (“MidiOutChannel” – “TransmitParameter” in the

Function settings)

Function (except for Transpose, SplitPoint and Midi settings).

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, and Function

(except for Transpose and SplitPoint setting) parameters are set

to Off. Other parameters are set to On.

You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default)

settings.

The CharacterCode parameter setting (page 47) does not

change.

The MemoryBackup parameter setting (On/Off) (left

column) is reset to the normal setting.

You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or

kept.

See the procedure on page 80.

Do not turn off the power during factory set. Doing so could result

in damage to the data.

Selecting for “MemorySong”:

MemorySongExcluded ....... Memory songs are kept.

MemorySongIncluded ........ Memory songs are erased.

Other method for restoring the normal

settings

Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7)

and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to

the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in

the storage memory are not erased.

Selecting items saved at shutdown

[MemoryBackup]

NO YES

MemoryBackup

Transpose Off

Select the desired item.

Select on or off.

Restoring the normal (default)

settings

[FactorySet]

CAUTION

NO YES

FactorySet Execute?-->

MemorySongExcluded

Reset the Clavinova.

Select whether the memory songs

are erased or kept.

[POWER] switch

Other settings [FUNCTION]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

103

Detailed Settings

For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you copy or save your important data to a USB storage

device. This provides a convenient backup if the internal

memory is damaged. Perform the operation after

connecting the USB storage device.

See the procedure on page 80.

It's best not to connect several USB storage devices when backing up your

data. When several devices are connected, a speciﬁc device cannot be

identiﬁed for saving data.

Do not execute “FullBackup” during ﬁle operations such as

loading songs. Doing so could result in damage to the data.

It may take 1 – 2 minutes to complete the backup.

Do not turn off the power during full backup. Doing so could result

in damage to the data.

Protected songs (indicated by MS/Ms in the display) cannot be saved.

Move the songs to the USB storage device before executing Full Backup.

If you do not move the protected songs and keep the data only in the

internal memory, the data will be deleted when you load the backup

settings to the instrument.

You can display the version number of the program of

this instrument, [LAN] port driver, and USB-LAN

adaptor driver.

See the procedure on page 80.

Setting for:

•Program (the program of this instrument)

•LAN port ([LAN] port driver)

•USB-LAN adaptor (USB-LAN adaptor driver)

Backing up the Clavinova's internal

data

[FullBackup]

NO YES

FullBackup Execute?-->

Save

Select “Save” or “Load.”

Perform backup.

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

Displaying the version number

[Version]

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

104

Detailed Settings

Message List

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message Meaning

•This message appears when data has failed to be written or loaded to the Storage memory

or USB storage device. When you write or load data via USB storage device, check the

USB cable connection and try again. If you still see this message, the Storage memory/

media/device may have malfunctioned or may be damaged.

•This message appears when a Read-Only ﬁle is selected to be overwritten. The ﬁle cannot

to be overwritten.

When you delete a folder, this message asks you whether you want to delete all of the ﬁles in

that folder. To delete all ﬁles in the folder, press the D [+ (YES)] button. To cancel, press the

D [– (NO)] button.

This message will appear when there is insufﬁcient empty space in backup memory. Turn

the power switch off and turn it on again to delete unnecessary backup data.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible and the settings reset

to their default values. In this case, perform the automatic adjustment once again.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible because no sound is

output from the rear speaker. In this case if the “Speaker” setting is Off, turn “Speaker” On. If

“Speaker” is set to Normal and headphones are connected, unplug the headphones.

This message will appear to conﬁrm start of the iAFC calibration. When calibrating, a test

tone will sound from the instrument.

This message conﬁrms that the operation has been cancelled.

This message appears when you do the following operation to a protected song:

•Overwrite (protected songs cannot be overwritten)

•Save with a new name (protected songs cannot be used with “Save as” function)

•Delete (this message conﬁrms that the protected song will be deleted)

•Rename (renamed protected songs may not be played back)

This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal

processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step.

This message appears when a communication error occurred between the instrument and

drive. Check the USB cable connection and try again. If you still see this message, use a drive

whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 122).

The number of drives exceeds the limitation. Two USB storage devices can be connected to

one USB [TO DEVICE] terminal using a hub device. This instrument can recognize up to

four drives in one USB storage device.

The power consumption of the connected USB device exceeds the predetermined value.

When a bus-powered USB hub is used, this message appears. The USB hub must be self-

powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on.

This message appears when the USB storage device is removed from the instrument.

AccessError

AllFiles?-->

BackupMemoryFull

CalibrationError

DefaultReset

Calibration

Speaker sound is off

Calibration Sure?-->

Test sound is output.

Canceled

Caution ProtectedSong

Completed

DriveError

DriveNumLimitOver

DrivePowerError

DriveRemoved

Message List

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

105

Detailed Settings

When you attempted to rename a song and save it in “Rename” (page 43), this message will

appear if an identically-named song already exists. Three seconds after this message is

displayed, you will return to the previous screen. Please specify a different name.

This message prompts you to execute a ﬁle-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button

to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then

proceed to the next step.

This message appears when factory set is completed. The instrument is then restarted.

The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on

page 102) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7

and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 102).

The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on

page 102) have been restored.

This message will appear when loading of the backup ﬁle is completed. The instrument is

then restarted.

There is a problem with the USB [TO HOST] terminal

•When using the CLP-380 connected to your personal computer:

The driver or MIDI application on your computer is not functioning correctly, perhaps

because the computer is turned off, the cable is not connected correctly. In this case, turn

off the power of the CLP-380 and your computer, and check the cable connections. Then

turn on the power in the order of your computer

→

CLP-380, and check that the driver

and MIDI application on your computer are functioning correctly.

•When using the CLP-380 by itself:

This message may appear if a cable is left connected to the USB [TO HOST] terminal of

the CLP-380. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-380, disconnect the cable, and

then turn on the power again. If the cable is left connected, the CLP-380 may not function

correctly.

This message will appear when the power is turned on after turning off the power while

saving a song or internal settings. The internal memory is being checked while this message

appears. If the internal settings are damaged, they will be reset to the initial settings. If

Memory songs are damaged, they will be deleted.

This message appears when you attempt to create a folder to a USB storage device that

cannot be accessed. Check that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument and

that the [SELECT] switch speciﬁes the appropriate device, then try again.

There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Save songs to

an external device (page 42) or delete some songs in the storage memory, then save new data

to memory.

A USB storage device was not connected to the instrument when you attempted to perform

a drive-related function. Connect the device and continue.

•This message will appear when there is no ﬁle to load from the media, even if the ﬁle name

is displayed. Securely insert the media.

•This message will appear when two-byte letters are included in the ﬁle name.

Message Meaning

DuplicateName

Execute?-->

Executing

FactorySet Completed

Restart

FactorySet Executing

MemorySongExcluded

FactorySet Executing

MemorySongIncluded

FullBackup Completed

Restart

HostError

LastPowerOffIllegal

MemoryChecking

MakeDir

---:Select USB Drive

MemoryFull

NoDrive

NoFile

Message List

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

106

Detailed Settings

You tried to copy a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device.

Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button.

You tried to move a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage

device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button.

You tried to rename a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage

device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button.

The connection has been cut off because of an abnormal power surge to the drive. To recover

from this, turn the power switch of the hub off and on again, or disconnect the USB storage

device from the instrument and turn the power switch of the instrument off and on again.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with

new data. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to

cancel.

This message appears when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to

the instrument. When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument.

You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song.

Wait until the message disappears.

This message appears when you try to write (save), copy, or delete data on a protected drive/

media. Set protect to off and try again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally

protected (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to such a

disk.

This message appears when a protected song and the drive are not compatible. Use a drive

whose compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 122).

You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected ﬁles (such as commercially available

music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such ﬁles.

This message appears when you play back a protected song which has a ﬁle format error.

After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current memory or storage

memory, you tried to save the song to a USB storage device. You cannot save such a song to

another disk. You cannot write or copy to such a disk.

This message appears when you copy a protected song. Protected songs cannot be copied.

However, you can move the song (page 45).

This message appears when you attempt to save a protected song (security song). Protected

songs cannot be saved.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B

[+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

Message Meaning

NoSongToCopy

NoSongToMove

NoSongToRename

OverCurrent

Overwrite?-->

PC<->CLP

InCommunication

PleaseWait

ProtectedDrive

ProtectedDriveError

ProtectedFile

ProtectedFileFormatError

ProtectedSong

ProtectedSong:UseMove

SecuritySongIsProtected

CannotSave

Set?-->

Message List

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

107

Detailed Settings

This message appears when you record or edit the protected song and select another song.

The recorded/edited protected song cannot be saved. The song will be deleted when you

select another song.

You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory

or an external device. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete

the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)]

button. The Clavinova displays the “Save” parameter screen. Save the recorded song and

proceed to another operation.

This message will appear if a problem is found with the song data when you select a song or

while the song is playing. In this case, reselect the song, and try once again to play it back. If

the message still appears, the song data may have been damaged.

1. This message will be displayed if current memory ﬁlls up during recording. Recording will

stop automatically at this point. The data that had been recorded up to that point will

remain. This message will also be displayed when you attempt to enter Record mode for

additional recording if that song already occupies all of current memory. In this case,

additional recording will not be possible. If there is an already-recorded part that you do

not need to keep, you can use “ChannelClear” (page 84) to delete the unneeded part, so

that you will then be able to record the equivalent amount of additional material.

2. This message will be displayed when you select a song if that song is larger than the

capacity of the current memory (page 39). This song cannot be loaded into the CLP-380,

and cannot be played back. Please select a different song.

This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button.

Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

This message prompts you to conﬁrm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to

continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

This message appears when the number of ﬁles and folders exceeds the system limit. The

maximum number of ﬁles/folders which can be stored in a folder is 250. Try again after

deleting/moving the unnecessary ﬁle(s).

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or drive-related operation using an unformatted media. Eject the

media, format it using the “Format” parameter (page 46), then try again.

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or drive-related operation using an unformatted media. To

cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the disk and try again, press the

B [+ (YES)] button to display the format parameter (page 46).

This message appears when you connect an unsupported drive. Use a drive whose

compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 122).

•The connected drive does not support use of protected songs. Use only drives whose

compatibility has been conﬁrmed by Yamaha (page 122).

•This message appears when the connected USB storage device is damaged and cannot be

accessed.

You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song

name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-380, and the CLP-

380 could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three

seconds. Rename the song correctly.

This message appears when, in copying a song, the same folder has been selected for both

the source and destination. You cannot select the same folder for both the source and

destination. Select the different folder as the destination folder.

Message Meaning

SongChanged Clear?

SongChanged Save?

SongError

SongTooBig

Start?-->

Sure?-->

SystemLimit

UnformattedDrive

UnformattedDrive Format?

UnsupportedDrive

WrongDrive

WrongName

WrongSelection

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

108

Detailed Settings

Questions about Operations and Functions

■ The buttons do not respond.

While you are using a function, some buttons not used

for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop

the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired

operation.

■ The sound sustains indeﬁnitely and does

not decay when I press the sostenuto

pedal.

With the voices in the CHURCH ORGAN, JAZZ

ORGAN, STRINGS, CHOIR group, or some voices in the

XG group, the sound continues sustaining while you are

holding down the sostenuto pedal.

■ Higher or lower notes does not sound

correctly when the transpose or octave

setting is made.

The setting range for the transposition and octave setting

is C -2 – G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88

keys covers the range of A -1 – C7.) If the lowest key is set

to a note lower than C -2, it will produce a sound one

octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher

than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower.

■ How can I return to the recording or song

select screen during song recording or

playback?

Press the [SONG SELECT] button once.

■ The tempo does not change even though

I recorded with tempo changes.

Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed

tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording

will be played back at the original tempo.

Make tempo changes when the recording part is selected

and a red part indicator is ﬂashing. The same trick applies

to editing the tempo after recording.

■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not

recorded.

Part data is lost unexpectedly.

For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording part for

the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part)

is automatically assigned (page 27). Therefore, if the part

already has data, the data will be overwritten during

recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in

the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the

notes you played with the second voice (or the notes

lower than the Split point) are not recorded.

What type of data is recorded?

Data recorded in the parts:

•Note data (notes you play)

•Voice selection

•Clavinova pedals and external pedal on/off

•Reverb depth [ReverbSend]

•Chorus depth [ChorusSend]

• DSP effect depth [DSPDepth]

•Sound brightness [Brightness]

•Resonance effect setting [HarmonicContent]

•Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting [EQLowFreq.]

•Equalizer’s low-range gain setting [EQLowGain]

•Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting [EQHighFreq.]

•Equalizer’s high-range gain setting [EQHighGain]

•Octave setting of the voice [Octave]

•Volume setting of each voice [Volume]

•Left/right position of each sound [Pan]

• Fine pitch adjustment between two voices (Dual only)

[Detune]

•Volume change in response to playing strength for each voice

[TouchSense]

Data recorded globally in all parts:

•Tempo

•Time signature

•Reverb type

•Chorus type

• DSP effect type

You can change all data except for note data, Octave

setting or Time Signature after recording.

Questions about Operations and Functions

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

109

Detailed Settings

■ How much data can I record?

•Current memory (page 39): About 300KB

•Storage memory (page 39): About 1,513KB

■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected

to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.

Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite

fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 98) in

the “FUNCTION” menu to change the external pedal

setting.

■ The song title is not correct.

The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that

used when you named the song. Also, if the song was

recorded on another instrument, the title might be

displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter

(page 47) in the FILE/SONG SETTING menu to change

the setting. However, if the song was recorded on another

instrument, changing the “CharacterCode” parameter

setting may not resolve the problem.

■ What is the difference between

“TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI

data?

“TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to

which the volume level changes in response to your touch

on the keyboard. The MIDI note-on velocity data is not

changed. It changes the volume level at the same velocity

data.

“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity of an

instrument. The MIDI note-on velocity data is changed

when you play the keyboard with a consistent touch.

■ Only “PhraseMark” can be selected via

the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button during

song playback.

The “PhraseMark” parameter can only be set via the

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song playback. If

you desired to select other parameters, stop the song and

try once again.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

110

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The power of the Clavinova does not

turn on.

The power cable is not plugged in

(check at the Clavinova and at the

electrical outlet).

Insert the power cable plug ﬁrmly

into the Clavinova and into the

electrical outlet of the correct voltage

(page 15).

There is a clicking noise when you

press the [POWER] button to turn the

power on or off.

This is caused by the electrical

power within the instrument.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard from the Clavinova. A portable telephone is being used

near the Clavinova (or the ring tone

is sounding).

Turn off the power of the portable

telephone located near the

Clavinova. Noise may be heard if a

portable telephone is used near the

Clavinova or if the ring tone occurs.

The overall volume is too low.

Or, there is no sound at all.

The [MASTER VOLUME] dial is

lowered.

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial

(page 16).

The volume level for the keyboard

performance is set too low.

Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider

toward the keyboard to increase the

keyboard volume.

Headphones are connected (only if

the Speaker setting is “Normal

HeadphoneSW”) (page 99).

Disconnect the headphone plug.

Speaker setting is off. Set [Speaker] to “Normal” or “ON”

(page 99).

Local Control is turned off. Set Local Control ON (page 100).

“Expression” is assigned to the right

pedal or the AUX pedal.

Assign any function other than

“Expression” to the pedal.

The keyboard volume is lower than

the song playback volume.

The volume level for the keyboard

performance is set too low.

Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider

toward the keyboard to increase the

keyboard volume.

Sound is still heard from the

speakers even though headphones

are plugged in.

Speaker setting is On. Set the speaker setting to “Normal

(HeadphoneSW)” (page 99).

The tone quality and/or volume from

the speaker or headphones has

changed.

Plugs are connected to the AUX

OUT jacks.

Disconnect the plugs.

Feedback occurs when you turn

iAFC on.

iAFC was not automatically adjusted

correctly.

Turn iAFC OFF, and perform the

automatic adjustment (page 93).

Damper pedal does not function. The plug of the pedal cable is not

inserted into the [PEDAL] jack.

Plug the pedal cable ﬁrmly into the

[PEDAL] jack. (Refer to “Keyboard

Stand Assembly” beginning on

page 117.)

Troubleshooting

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

111

Appendix

The USB storage device is not

recognized by the instrument.

The USB storage device may not be

recognized by the instrument

depending on the timing of the

device connection or the setting of

the [SELECT] switch.

Disconnect the USB storage device

and connect it again and select a

device using the [SELECT] switch.

To view the data of the USB storage

device on the CLP display, press the

[SONG SELECT] button to engage

song selection mode or press the

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button to

engage ﬁle/song setting mode. If

you try to engage these modes

before connecting the USB storage

device, press the [EXIT] button to

exit the mode and re-engage the

mode. If the device is still not

recognized, it may not be supported

by Yamaha. Only use devices

supported by Yamaha (page 122).

The USB storage device has hung

up (stopped).

The USB storage device is not

compatible with the instrument.

Only use devices whose

compatibility has been conﬁrmed by

Yamaha (page 122).

The USB storage device does not

operate properly.

Disconnect the device and connect

it to the instrument again.

The folder name does not change. A maximum of 13 characters from a

folder name can be displayed.

Therefore, if several folders have the

same 13 characters at the start of

their names, it will appear that they

do not change when the C [–][+]

buttons are pressed.

Shorten long folder names on your

computer before using them.

Problem Cause Solution

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

112

Appendix

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data

recorded by CLP-380, and whether or not the CLP-380 can playback commercially available song data or song data

created for other instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you

may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back

data, please refer to the information below.

Basic Check Points

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to

the items below.

• Sequence format

•Voice allocation format

•Disk Format (ﬂoppy disk drive is optional)

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the

disk matches that of the MIDI device.

The CLP-380 is compatible with the following formats.

■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of

two types: Format 0 or Format 1.

•Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and

most commercially available software is recorded as

Format 0.

•The CLP-380 is compatible with both Format 0 and

Format 1.

•Performance data recorded on the CLP-380 is saved in

the SMF format 0.

■ ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments. This is a common format used with various

Yamaha software.

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Vo ices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback.

The CLP-380 is compatible with the following formats.

■ GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level 1, as is most commercially available software.

■ GM System Level 2

“GM System Level 2” is a standard speciﬁcation hat

enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves

song data compatibility. It provides for increased

polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice

parameters, and integrated effect processing.

■ XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure

compatibility of data well into the future.

Song data recorded on the CLP-380 using voices in the

XG category is XG-compatible.

Data Compatibility

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

113

Appendix

■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series

instruments.

This is also common format used with various Yamaha

software.

■ GS

GS was developed by the Roland Corporation.

In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major

enhancement of the GM speciﬁcally to provide more

voices and drum kits and their variations, as well as

greater expressive control over voices and effects.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions

above, the data may still not be completely compatible,

depending on the speciﬁcations of the devices and

particular data recording methods.

Disk format

It is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy disk to the

system of the device being used. This operation is called

“formatting.”

•There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (double

sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high

density), and each type has different formatting

systems.

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be

used is compatible with the format of the disk.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

114

Appendix

Preset Voice List

: Yes ×: No

Voice group Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GRAND

PIANO1

GrandPiano1

This sound was newly sampled from a full

concert grand piano. Five stages of dynamics

were sampled, and no effort has been spared

in making the sound virtually identical to that

of an acoustic piano. Even the tonal changes

produced by the damper pedal and the subtle

sounds of releasing a key are reproduced.

The sympathetic vibration (string resonance)

that occurs between the strings of an acoustic

piano has also been simulated. Suitable not

only for classical compositions but also for

piano pieces of any style.

MellowPiano

A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for

classical music.

RockPiano

A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles.

HonkyTonk

Piano

A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal

character that is quite different than a grand

piano.

GRAND

PIANO2

GrandPiano2

×× ×

A spacious and clear piano sound with a

bright resonance. Ideal for popular music.

BrightPiano

×× ×

A spacious and bright piano sound. Ideal for

popular and rock music.

E.PIANO1

E.Piano1

×××

An electronic piano sound produced by an FM

synthesizer. The tone will change as you vary

your playing touch. Ideal for popular music.

SynthPiano

××××

This voice simulates the electric piano sound

produced by synthesizers in popular music. It

also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.

E.PIANO2

E.Piano2

××

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-

struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played

lightly, and an aggressive tone when played

hard.

Vintage

E.Piano

×××

A different type of electric piano sound.

Widely used in rock and popular music.

HARPSI

CHORD

Harpsichord8'

×× ×

The sound of the instrument frequently used

in baroque music. Variations in playing touch

will not affect the volume, and a characteristic

sound will be heard when you release the key.

Harpsichord

8'+4'

×× ×

A harpsichord with an added upper octave.

Produces a more brilliant sound.

E.CLAVI

CHORD

E.Clavichord

×× ×

This is the voice of a keyboard that produces

sound by striking the strings with magnetic

pickups. This funky sound is popular in black

contemporary music. Because of its unique

structure, the instrument produces a peculiar

sound when you release the keys.

Wah Clavi.

×× ×

A distinctive effect is preset.

VIBRA-

PHONE

Vibraphone

××

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets.

The tone becomes more metallic the harder

you play.

Marimba

×× ×

A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for

spaciousness and realism.

Celesta

××

The sound of a celesta (a percussion

instrument in which hammers strike metallic

bars to produce sound). This instrument is

well-known for its appearance in “Dance of

the Sugar-plum Fairies” from Tchaikovsky’s

“Nutcracker Suite.”

GUITAR

NylonGuitar

××

A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound.

Enjoy the atmosphere it adds to a quiet song.

SteelGuitar

××××

A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular

music.

Preset Voice List

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

115

Appendix

CHURCH

ORGAN

PipeOrgan

Principal

××× ×

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)

organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.

PipeOrgan

Tutti

××× ×

This voice features a full coupler of a pipe

organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta

and Fugue by Bach.

PipeOrgan

Flute1

××× ×

A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8'

+ 4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for

accompanying hymns.

PipeOrgan

Flute2

××× ×

A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8'

+ 4' + 1-1/3'). This is brighter than

PipeOrganFlute1, and is suitable for solos.

JAZZOR-

GAN

JazzOrgan

×××× ×

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric

organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.

RotaryOrgan

×××× ×

A bright electric organ sound.

MellowOrgan

×××× ×

A mellow electric organ sound. Ideal for

calmer songs.

STRINGS

Strings

×× ×

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings

ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining

this voice with piano in the Dual mode.

SynthStrings

××××

A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable

for sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

SlowStrings

×× ×

The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow

attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with

GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO.

CHOIR

Choir

××××

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for

creating rich harmonies in slow pieces.

SlowChoir

××××

The sound of a choir with a slow attack.

Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND

PIANO or E.PIANO.

Scat

×××

You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.

Depending on how hard and what note range

you play, different sounds will be produced.

SYNTH.

PAD

SynthPad1

××××

A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound.

Ideal for sustained parts in the background of

an ensemble.

SynthPad2

××××

A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for

sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

WOOD

BASS

WoodBass

×××

The sound of a ﬁnger-plucked upright bass.

Frequently used in jazz and Latin music.

Bass&Cymbal

×××

The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto

the bass. Effective when used for jazz

walking-bass lines.

E.BASS

ElectricBass

××××

The sound of an electric bass. Frequently

used in jazz, rock, and popular music.

FretlessBass

××××

The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for

styles such as jazz and fusion.

Voice group Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

116

Appendix

Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)

Dual

Split

Dual + Split

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2

This combination is often used in popular music.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 This combination sounds as if you are playing two

notes that are one octave apart. It is suitable for the

accompaniment of Salsa music.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + E.Clavichord This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul

music.

MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination is very suitable for Baroque

music.

MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs This combination adds strings and bell sound.

A delay effect is automatically applied.

MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass

or Bass&Cymbal

This is recommended for light Jazz music. The

damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to

the right-hand range.

MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute

song.

MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 Play these voices elegantly along with piano

arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would

be more effective.

MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz

chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a

variety of expressions.

MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create

an interesting sound.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString /

GrandPiano1

This combination creates the thick sound of a

layered piano and strings.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /

ElectricBass

This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb

and chorus (page 88) will improve the groove. The

damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to

the right-hand range.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /

Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination makes a very brilliant sound.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

117

Appendix

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

•Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance

with the sequence given below.

•Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

•Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

•Assemble the stand on a ﬂat ﬂoor with ample space.

•Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.

•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Remove all parts from the box. Conﬁrm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

Connector

panel

AC IN

Styrofoam pads

Take out the styrofoam pads, and place A on top of the pads.

Position the styrofoam pads to protect the connector panel at

the bottom of A and the AC IN.

6 x 25mm long screws x 4

Pedal cord

6 x 16mm short screws x 6

4 x 14mm thin screws x 8

4 x 20mm tapping screws x 5

4 x 10mm thin screws x 2

Cord holders x 2

Headphone hanger

AC power cord

(The shape of plug

differs depending

on locale.)

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

118

Appendix

1. Attach E and F to D.

1-1 Secure D using the four 6 x 25mm long screws.

1-2 Remove the twist tie from the folded pedal cord.

Do not remove the twist tie located next to the

hole.

Don’t discard the twist tie, you’ll need it later in

step 6.

2. Attach B.

2-1 Insert B between E and F as shown in the

illustration.

2-2 Align and attach B to the front side of D, E and F.

2-3 Secure B using the 4 x 14mm thin screws.

*Insert two screws into the smaller holes on the

brackets.

2-4 Te mporarily secure with 4 x 14mm thin screws.

*Insert four screws into the smaller holes on the

brackets.

3. Lay A into position.

Align the screw threads on the bottom of A with

the screw threads of E and F, while gently lowering

A into position.

1-2

1-1

CAUTION

Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and

the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop

the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the

position shown in the illustration.

2-3

2-4

15cm

Place your hands

at least 15 cm from either

end of A when positioning it.

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

119

Appendix

4. Attach A.

4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right

ends of A will project beyond E and F equally (as

seen from the rear).

4-2 Secure A using two 6 x 16mm short screws from

the rear.

4-3 Secure A using four 6 x 16mm short screws from

the front.

4-4 Firmly tighten the screws from the upper parts

you temporarily fastened in step 2-4 above

(assembly B).

5. Connect the speaker cord.

5-1 Remove the twist tie attaching the speaker cord.

5-2 Insert the speaker cord plug into the connector so

that the tab extends toward the front when viewed

from the rear.

6. Connect the pedal cord.

6-1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the [PEDAL]

connector.

6-2 Attach the cord holders to the instrument, then

clip the cord into the holders. At this time, be

careful that the pedal cord isn’t loose between the

plug and cord holder.

6-3 Use a twist tie to bundle the pedal cord.

4-2

4-1

4-3

4-4

5-2

6-1

6-2

6-3

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

120

Appendix

7. Attach C.

7-1 Place on D, the stopper-wood at the bottom edges

of C, then secure the top.

7-2 Secure upper right and left of C using two 4 x

14mm thin screws.

7-3 Secure upper center and lower of C using ﬁve

4 x 20mm tapping screws.

8. Connect the power cord.

Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC IN].

9. Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact

with the ﬂoor surface.

10.

Attach the headphone hanger.

You can attach a headphone hanger on the

Clavinova to hang the headphones.

Install the headphone hanger using included two

screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

7-1

7-2

7-3

240

127

110

220

For models that feature

a voltage selector:

Set the voltage selector to an

appropriate voltage.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of

the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set

the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages,

use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that

the correct voltage for your region appears next to the

pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V

when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC

power cord to the [AC IN] and an AC wall outlet. A plug

adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the

pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

WARNING

An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

the Clavinova or result in improper operation.

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

121

Appendix

After completing the assembly, please

check the following.

• Are there any parts left over?

Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors.

•Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other

movable ﬁxtures?

Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

•Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

Tighten all screws.

•Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the

ﬂoor.

•Is the power cord inserted securely into the

socket?

Check the connection.

•If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the

assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.

CAUTION

When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold

instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main

unit and by the handles in the rear panel.

Do not hold the key cover. Improper handling can result in

damage to the instrument or personal injury.

Do not hold here.

Hold here.

After transporting the instrument, do the following to

ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function

(page 92):

• Place the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm

away from the wall.

•Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function

(page 93).

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

122

Appendix

Precautions when using the USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure

to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.

n For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive,

hard disk drive, etc.)

• USB hub

• USB-LAN adaptor

The instrument does not necessarily support all

commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot

guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase.

Before purchasing a USB device for use with this

instrument, please visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

n Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or

mouse cannot be used.

Connecting USB device

•When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on

the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the

proper direction.

CAUTION

When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE]

terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key

cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB device

connected, the USB device may be damaged.

•If you intend to connect two or three devices at the

same time to a terminal, you should use a USB hub

device. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its

own power source) and the power must be on. Only

one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears

while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the

instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument

and re-connect the USB hub.

•Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

123

Appendix

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as

read data from the connected device.

n Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals;

one on the left of the panel and one on the terminal at the

front.

Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used

at the same time. Use the [SELECT] switch to select the

desired terminal. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on

the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the

terminal panel at the front.

CAUTION

While the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, do

NOT use the [SELECT] switch.

CAUTION

While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save,

Copy and Delete operations), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch.

Doing so may corrupt the media or data.

n If you connect USB storage devices to both USB [TO

DEVICE] terminals, the devices may not operate

properly.

The number of USB storage device to be

used

Up to two USB storage devices can be connected to the

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB

hub. The number of USB storage devices that can be used

simultaneously with musical instruments even when a

USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument

can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation

(page 46).

CAUTION

The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.

Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain

important data. Proceed with caution, especially when

connecting multiple USB storage media.

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each

storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB

storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage

device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure

that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the

Save, Copy and Delete operations).

CAUTION

Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing

so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or

hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as

during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is

mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection),

do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media

from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device.

Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.

Using USB Storage Devices

USB TO DEVICE

SELECT

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B

Select the desired

terminal

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

124

Appendix

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks (Optional)

An optional ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to

this instrument. For instructions on installing the

ﬂoppy disk drive, see page 125.

The ﬂoppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve

created on the instrument to ﬂoppy disk, and allows you

to load data from ﬂoppy disk to the instrument.

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive

with care. Follow the important precautions below.

Floppy Disk Compatibility

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Formatting a Floppy Disk

If you ﬁnd that you are unable to use new, blank disks or

old disks that have been used with other devices, you may

need to format them. For details on how to format a disk,

see page 46. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be

lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand

whether or not the disk contains important data.

n Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be

useable as is on other devices.

Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward

and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk

slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing

it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject

button pops out.

n Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive.

Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or

ﬂoppy disks.

Removing a Floppy Disk

After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the

ﬂoppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the ﬂoppy disk

drive is off), ﬁrmly press the eject button at the upper

right of the disk slot all the way in. When the ﬂoppy disk

is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the ﬂoppy disk cannot

be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but

instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-

inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again.

*Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as

recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a ﬂoppy disk is

inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically

accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has

data.

CAUTION

Do not remove the ﬂoppy disk or turn off the instrument itself

while the disk is being accessed.

Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also

damage to the ﬂoppy disk drive.

Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt

that can cause data-read and -write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually

cause read and write errors.

To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head

about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the

availability of proper head cleaning disks.

About Floppy Disks

Handle ﬂoppy disks with care, and follow

these precautions:

•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy

disks in their protective cases when they are not in use.

•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

•Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data

on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

•Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached

in the proper location.

To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab):

To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab

open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-

protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed).

Write-protect tab open

(protect position)

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

125

Appendix

Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)

The optional UD-FD01 ﬂoppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included ﬂoppy

disk drive case and screws.

1. Remove the three backing papers

from the adhesive tape in the case,

and ﬁt the ﬂoppy disk drive into

the case.

2. Fold the USB cable inside the case

as shown.

3. Attach the drive and case assembly

to the left underside of the

instrument, using the included four

screws (4mm x 10mm).

4. Connect the USB cable to the USB

[TO DEVICE] terminal.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

Insert the drive to the case, with the side

having the rubber stoppers facing the case.

Dual-sided adhesive tape

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

126

Appendix

Options

■ BC-100 Bench

A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha

Clavinova.

■ HPE-160 Stereo Headphones

High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with

extra-soft ear pads.

■ UD-FD01 USB-FDD Unit

Floppy disk drive for connecting to the instrument and

saving/loading data.

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

127

Appendix

Speciﬁcations

Item CLP-380

Size/Weight

Dimensions

Width 1406mm (55 3/8")

Height

943mm (37 1/8")

With music rest: 1037mm (40 13/16")

Depth 512mm (20 3/16")

Weight Weight 95kg (209 lb 7 oz)

Control

Interface

Keyboard

Number of Keys 88

Type

NW (Natural Wood) with synthetic ivory keytops (with

real-wood white keys)

Touch Sensitivity Yes

Pedal

Number of Pedals 3

Half Pedal Yes

Functions Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft

Display

Type LCD

Size 24-character x 2-line

Color Monochrome

Contrast Yes

Language English, Japanese

Panel Language English

Cabinet

Key Cover Key Cover Style Sliding

Music Rest Yes

Music Clips Yes

Voices

Tone Generation

Tone Generation Technology AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Number of Dynamic Levels 5

Stereo Sustain Samples Yes

Key-off Samples Yes

String Resonance Yes

Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 128

Preset Number of Voices 38 + 480 XG + 12 Drum Kits

Compatibility

XG Yes

GS Yes

GM Yes

GM2 Yes

Effects

Types

Reverb 5

Chorus 3

Brilliance 7

DSP 12

iAFC Yes

Functions

Dual/Layers Yes

Split Yes

Songs

Preset Number of Preset Songs 50

Recording

Number of Songs (max.) 250

Number of Tracks 16

Data Capacity 1.47MB

Compatible Data

Format

Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1), ESEQ

Recording SMF (Format 0)

Specifications

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

128

Appendix

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or

modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Functions

Overall Controls

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 5 – 500

Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12

Tuning Yes

Scale Type 7 types

Storage and

Connectivity

Storage

Floppy Disk Drive Optional

Internal Memory 1.47MB

External Drives

(USB Storage Device)

Optional

Connectors

Headphones x 2

MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU]

AUX IN [L/L+R][R]

AUX OUT [L/L+R][R]

[AUX PEDAL] Yes

USB [TO DEVICE] x 2 (selectable)

USB [TO HOST] Yes

[LAN] Yes

Ampliﬁers and

Speakers

Ampliﬁers 35W x 2 + 20W x 2 + 20W x 2 + 12W x 2

Speakers 16cm x 2, 2.5cm (DOME) x 2, 8cm x 4

Tri-Amp System Yes

Service

Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Yes

Bundled

Software

CD-ROM Yes

Accessories

Included Accessories

Owner’s Manual, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows

Installation Guide, “50 greats for the Piano” Score

Collection, AC Power Cord, Bench (included or

optional depending on locale), Data List, My Yamaha

Product User Registration

Item CLP-380

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

129

Appendix

Index

You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.

The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.

Numerics

50 greats for the Piano ................................................................. 7

50 Piano Preset Songs ................................................................ 19

Practicing a one-hand part ........................................... 21

A – D [–][+] buttons ................................................................. 12

A-B repeat ..................................................................................22

Accessories ................................................................................... 7

Adding variation to the sound ➔ Effect function .................... 25

Assembly .................................................................................. 117

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to a pedal ...... 98

AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ........................................................73

AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks .................................................... 73

[AUX PEDAL] jack .................................................................... 72

Auxiliary pedal function ............................................................ 97

Backup .............................................................................. 102, 103

Bench ............................................................................................ 7

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/[BRIGHT] buttons ......................25

Calibration ................................................................................. 93

Center pedal ............................................................................... 24

Center pedal function ................................................................ 96

CharacterCode ........................................................................... 47

Characters .................................................................................. 47

[CHORUS] button .................................................................... 26

combining two voices ➔ Dual mode ........................................ 27

Connection

computer ....................................................................... 75

Other Components ....................................................... 72

Speaker .......................................................................... 73

USB [TO HOST] .......................................................... 76

[CONTRAST] knob ..................................................................15

CONTRAST* ............................................................................. 15

Copy ........................................................................................... 44

Current memory ........................................................................ 39

Current song .............................................................................. 39

Damper (right) pedal ................................................................ 24

Data Compatibility ..................................................................112

Data type .................................................................................... 50

Default (Normal) setting* ......................................................... 25

Delete .......................................................................................... 43

[DEMO] button ......................................................................... 17

Demonstration tunes ................................................................. 17

Detailed Settings ........................................................................77

Function ........................................................................94

iAFC ...............................................................................92

Metronome ...................................................................85

recording and playback ................................................82

voices .............................................................................86

display .........................................................................................12

Display contrast .........................................................................15

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) ..........................................113

DOWN (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20

metronome ....................................................................30

Driver ..........................................................................................75

Dual

Detailed settings ............................................................86

Recording ......................................................................38

Dual mode ➔ combining two voices ........................................27

Effect function ............................................................................25

equalizer .....................................................................................90

ESEQ .........................................................................................112

[EXIT] button ............................................................................13

External song ..............................................................................39

[EXTRA PARTS] button .....................................................31, 35

FactorySet .................................................................................102

Fast forward ..........................................................................20, 49

FILE* ...........................................................................................39

[FILE/SONG SETTING] button .........................................39, 82

Floppy Disk ......................................................................124, 125

Floppy Disk Drive ....................................................................125

Format ........................................................................................46

[FUNCTION] button ..........................................................79, 94

GM System Level 1 ...................................................................112

GM System Level 2 ...................................................................112

GS ..............................................................................................113

Headphones ...............................................................................16

iAFC

iAFC Detailed settings ..................................................92

[iAFC SETTING] button .....................................................78, 92

Internet Direct Connection (IDC) ............................................51

Index

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

130

Appendix

Jacks

AUX IN ......................................................................... 73

AUX OUT ..................................................................... 73

AUX PEDAL ................................................................. 72

PHONES ....................................................................... 16

key cover ..................................................................................... 14

KeyOffSampling ......................................................................... 99

LCD ➔ Screen

Contrast ......................................................................... 15

Left .............................................................................................. 86

Left × Layer ................................................................................ 86

[LEFT] button ................................................................ 21, 31, 35

Left pedal .................................................................................... 24

Left pedal function ..................................................................... 96

List

Demonstration tunes .................................................... 17

Detailed Settings ........................................................... 77

Message ....................................................................... 104

Preset Voice ................................................................. 114

M ................................................................................................. 40

Main ........................................................................................... 86

Main × Layer .............................................................................. 86

MakeDir ..................................................................................... 45

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ........................................................ 16

MASTER VOLUME* ................................................................. 16

MEMORY .................................................................................. 48

Memory ...................................................................................... 39

Memory song .............................................................................39

MemoryBackup ....................................................................... 102

Message List .............................................................................104

METRONOME [ON/OFF] button ........................................... 30

METRONOME [SETTING] button ................................... 77, 85

MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] terminals .......................................72

MIDI cables ................................................................................ 76

Midi settings ............................................................................... 79

MIDI terminals .......................................................................... 76

Move ........................................................................................... 45

MP .............................................................................................. 40

MS ............................................................................................... 40

Ms ............................................................................................... 40

Music braces ............................................................................... 14

Music Data .................................................................................48

Music rest ................................................................................... 14

New Song ....................................................................................31

Normal setting* ..........................................................................25

Other settings .............................................................................94

P ..................................................................................................40

Parameter List ............................................................................77

Pedal Function

Auxiliary ........................................................................97

Center ............................................................................96

Left .................................................................................96

Right ..............................................................................96

Pedals ..........................................................................................24

Personal computer .....................................................................75

[PHONES] jacks ........................................................................16

PhraseMark ................................................................................82

PLAY/PAUSE

50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20

Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49

[PLAY/PAUSE] button ........................................................20, 49

Playback

50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20

Demo Songs ..................................................................17

Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49

Playing back repeatedly (song) .................................................82

playing two voices ➔ Split mode ..............................................28

[POWER] switch ........................................................................15

Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) ...........................21

PRESET

50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................19

Preset song memory ..................................................................39

Preset Voice List .......................................................................114

[REC] button .............................................................................32

Recording in Dual ......................................................................38

Recording in Split ......................................................................38

Recording Your Performance ...................................................31

Rename .......................................................................................43

[REPEAT] button ......................................................................22

Repeat Playback .........................................................................22

Re-recording a song partially ....................................................33

[REVERB] button ......................................................................26

Rewind ..................................................................................20, 49

[RIGHT] button ............................................................21, 31, 35

Right pedal .................................................................................24

Right pedal function ..................................................................96

RIGHT/LEFT

50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................21

Index

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

131

Appendix

Save ............................................................................................. 42

Scale ............................................................................................ 95

Select

50 piano preset songs ................................................... 19

Demo Songs .................................................................. 17

[SELECT] switch ...................................................................... 123

Selecting a touch response ......................................................... 94

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ...................................................... 112

Soft (left) pedal .......................................................................... 24

Song

Data Type ...................................................................... 50

Detailed settings ............................................................ 82

Playing back repeatedly ................................................ 82

[SONG BALANCE] slider ......................................................... 38

SONG SELECT

Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................48

[SONG SELECT] button ..................................................... 19, 48

SongAutoOpen .......................................................................... 46

Sostenuto (center) pedal ........................................................... 24

Sound

brilliance ........................................................................ 25

expression ..................................................................... 25

reverberation ................................................................. 26

spread and spaciousness ............................................... 26

Soundboard reverb .................................................................... 26

Split

Detailed settings ............................................................ 86

Recording ...................................................................... 38

[SPLIT] button .......................................................................... 28

Split mode ➔ playing two voices .............................................. 28

Split point ................................................................................... 29

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 28

STOP

50 Piano Preset Songs ................................................... 20

Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49

[STOP] button ..................................................................... 20, 49

Storage memory ......................................................................... 39

StringResonance ........................................................................ 99

SustainSampling ........................................................................ 99

Sync Start

50 preset songs .............................................................. 21

Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49

TEMPO

50 Piano Preset Songs ................................................... 20

metronome ................................................................... 30

Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49

TEMPO [UP] [DOWN] buttons .............................................. 30

Terminals

MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] ................................... 72, 76

USB [TO DEVICE] ...................................................... 72

USB [TO HOST] .......................................................... 72

TouchResponse .......................................................................... 94

Transpose ...................................................................................94

Troubleshooting .......................................................................110

Tune ............................................................................................95

Type of characters ......................................................................47

Type of data (recorded) ...........................................................108

U1 ...............................................................................................40

U1P .............................................................................................40

U1S .............................................................................................40

U1s ..............................................................................................40

UP (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20

metronome ....................................................................30

USB [TO DEVICE] terminal .....................................................72

USB [TO HOST] terminal ........................................................72

USB1 ...........................................................................................48

Voice group buttons ............................................................23, 28

[VOICE SETTING] button .......................................................78

Voices* ........................................................................................23

Detailed settings ............................................................86

Volume

Balance (SONG BLANCE) ...........................................38

Setting ............................................................................16

XG .............................................................................................112

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

132

Memo

CLP-380 Owner’s Manual

133

Memo

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Piano

Model Name : CLP-380PE/380PM

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not

correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your

plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the

three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires)

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB49

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WM91210 903MWAP3.2-05D0 Printed in China

Clavinova Web site

http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

CLP-380 OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT —Check your power supply— Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the rear panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. CLP-380 Model Serial No. 92-469- ➀ (bottom) Purchase Date Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. C A U T I ON RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 12 13 14 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multipleconnector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. (1)B-12 4 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • In the case of a model with a polished finish, gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's finish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry/dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Handling caution • Current data (page 39) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument before saving. Save the data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • In the case of a model with a polished finish, bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1)B-12 2/2 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 5 Introduction Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-380. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. Introduction About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Data List” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. Data List: Normal (Default) Setting List, XG Voice List, etc. The Effect Parameter List, Effect Data Assign Table, MIDI Data Format, and MIDI Implementation Chart are available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ • The model CLP-380 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Copying of commercially available software or music data for purposes other than your personal use is strictly prohibited. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software and MIDI files, etc. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended. AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1986-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. Trademarks • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function (page 92): • Place the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm away from the wall. • Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 93). 6 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Main Features Introduction NW (Natural Wood) with synthetic ivory keytops This type of keyboard features the feel of real ivory. The special Natural Wood keyboard also uses real-wood white keys. The key surface is soft and slightly porous, giving the keys added grip and a natural friction that lets you play easily. This authentic touch and feel of the keys goes far beyond existing electronic keyboards, making you feel as if you’re playing a real grand piano. The specially crafted keyboard also lets you use techniques only possible on grand pianos, such as playing the same note successively and having the sounds blend smoothly even without use of the damper pedal, or playing the same key quickly and having perfect articulation without the sound cutting off unnaturally. AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling The CLP-380 features Yamaha’s original AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling tone-generation technology that gives the instrument its rich, authentic voices and unmatched sonic realism. AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) is a sampling system which creates authentic acoustic instrument sounds by using digital technology to record the actual instrument sound and applying high-quality digital filter technology to the recorded audio samples. The GRAND PIANO 1 Voice in particular features completely new samples recorded from a full-size concert grand piano. Each sampled note has been adjusted and processed meticulously to ensure the very best sound—with instantaneous attack and expressive response. This special Voice features three velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), Sustain Sampling for recreating the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and Key-off Samples that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. These sophisticated features and advanced technologies ensure that the instrument sounds and plays virtually the same as an actual acoustic piano. Tri-Amp System The instrument has a built-in Tri-Amp System that features separate amplification for each speaker range— high, mid, and low—providing greater clarity and accuracy from each speaker, ensuring optimum volume balance for each octave range, and letting you enjoy richer, more natural, expansive sound. The Acoustic Ambience of a Grand Piano—with the iAFC Feature Turn on the iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if you’re playing on stage in a concert hall. Use the Spatial Effect to recreate and emphasize the natural sounds of true acoustic instruments. The overall sound is deeper and more resonant, especially when using the damper pedal (Dynamic Damper Effect). Internet Direct Connection (IDC) By directly connecting the CLP-380 to the Internet, you can use the special service on the Yamaha website that enables you to automatically play back a wide variety of songs (song data) in various musical genres directly on your instrument. Included Accessories • “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection • Owner’s Manual • Data List • Bench (included or optional depending on locale) • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide • AC Power Cord • My Yamaha Product User Registration The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 7 Table of contents Introduction 6 Introduction About this Owner’s Manual and Data List......................................................................................................6 Main Features ...................................................................................................................................................7 Included Accessories.........................................................................................................................................7 Panel Controls and Terminals........................................................................................................ 10 Introduction to the Controls ......................................................................................................... 12 Before Using the Clavinova........................................................................................................... 14 About the key cover........................................................................................................................................14 About the music rest.......................................................................................................................................14 About the music braces ..................................................................................................................................14 Turning the power on ....................................................................................................................................15 Adjusting the display contrast........................................................................................................................15 Setting the volume ..........................................................................................................................................16 Using headphones ..........................................................................................................................................16 Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment.................................................................................................16 Basic Operation 17 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes......................................................................................... 17 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs............................................................................................... 19 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ..................................................................................................................19 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs.........................................................................................21 Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset songs............................................................22 Selecting and Playing Voices......................................................................................................... 23 Selecting Voices ..............................................................................................................................................23 Using the pedals..............................................................................................................................................24 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] ...................................................25 Combining two voices (Dual mode) .............................................................................................................27 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)..............................................28 Using the metronome.....................................................................................................................................30 Recording Your Performance ........................................................................................................ 31 Recording a New Song ...................................................................................................................................31 Recording a performance without specifying the recording part ................................................................32 Recording a performance of several different parts......................................................................................35 Other recording techniques ...........................................................................................................................36 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] ........................................... 39 Basic file operation .........................................................................................................................................41 Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save].............................................................................42 Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device ... [Delete] ...........43 Renaming files ... [Rename]...........................................................................................................................43 Copying files ... [Copy]...................................................................................................................................44 Moving files ... [Move] ...................................................................................................................................45 Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir]..............................................................................45 Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format]...............................................................................................46 Automatically selecting a song in storage media ... [SongAutoOpen] ........................................................46 Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode] ..................................................................47 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data .................................... 48 Playing back a song.........................................................................................................................................48 Turning part playback on and off..................................................................................................................50 Supported song data type...............................................................................................................................50 8 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Table of contents Internet Direct Connection (IDC)................................................................................................... 51 Introduction Connecting the Instrument to the Internet...................................................................................................51 About the Internet Settings (settings concerning the access point).............................................................54 About the Internet Settings ............................................................................................................................58 Calling Up the Connection Information.......................................................................................................61 Exporting the Connection Information ........................................................................................................62 Restoring the Internet Settings to Normal (Default) Settings......................................................................63 Message List (IDC) .........................................................................................................................................64 Error Code List (IDC) ....................................................................................................................................66 Glossary of Terms (IDC)................................................................................................................................67 Troubleshooting (IDC) ..................................................................................................................................69 Listening to the Songs on Internet ............................................................................................... 70 Connections .................................................................................................................................... 72 Connectors......................................................................................................................................................72 Connecting to a USB storage device..............................................................................................................74 Connecting a personal computer ..................................................................................................................75 Detailed Settings 77 Detailed Settings............................................................................................................................ 77 Parameter List .................................................................................................................................................77 Making detailed settings.................................................................................................................................80 Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] ......................................... 82 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ................................................. 85 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] ....................................................................... 86 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] ................................................................................... 92 Other settings [FUNCTION]............................................................................................................ 94 Message List ................................................................................................................................. 104 Questions about Operations and Functions .............................................................................. 108 Appendix 110 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................... 110 Data Compatibility ....................................................................................................................... 112 Preset Voice List ........................................................................................................................... 114 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)........................................................................... 116 Keyboard Stand Assembly .......................................................................................................... 117 Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal ........................................................... 122 Using USB Storage Devices ..........................................................................................................................123 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (Optional) ........................................ 124 Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional)................................................................................ 125 Options ......................................................................................................................................... 126 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 127 Index ............................................................................................................................................. 129 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals 2 3 4 6 Introduction 5 7 9 ) 8 ! # @ $ # & % Top panel * ^ ( º £ 1 SELECT USB TO DEVICE ∞ ¢ Jacks & Terminals £ § ¶ • ª ‚ ⁄ Make sure when using the jacks and terminals to carefully check the names as printed on the panel before making connections. AC IN 220 240 110 127 ¤ 10 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual ¡ ™ 1 [POWER] switch .................................... page 15 ¡ [iAFC SETTING] button ................. pages 78, 92 2 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ....................... page 16 When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper, more resonant, and more similar to the sound of an actual acoustic instrument. You can turn the iAFC function on or off or make detailed settings for the iAFC. Adjust the volume level using this dial. 3 [SONG BALANCE] slider ....................... page 38 This lets you adjust the volume balance between the song playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard. 4 [DEMO] button ..................................... page 17 Demonstration playback is available for each voice. 5 [REPEAT] button ................................... page 22 For repeatedly playing back a single song or specifying a range (in beats) within a song for repeated playback. 6 [RIGHT], [LEFT], [EXTRA PARTS] buttons ..................................................pages 21, 31, 35 For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. 7 [REC] button.......................................... page 32 In order to obtain the optimal results from iAFC, we recommend that you do the following. • Position the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm away from the wall. • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you move the Clavinova (page 93). ™ [FUNCTION] button....................... pages 79, 94 This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the keyboard touch, making fine adjustments to the pitch or MIDI settings. For recording your keyboard performance. £ USB [TO DEVICE] terminals ................. page 72 8 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons ..................................................pages 20, 49, 71 For connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, allowing saving/loading of data to and from the connected device. The instrument has two [TO DEVICE] terminals, A (on the left of the keyboard) and B (on the connector panel at the bottom), which can be specified using the [SELECT] switch. For playing back the preset songs, your recorded material, commercially available music data, or songs from the Internet, etc. 9 [SONG SELECT] button ..................pages 19, 48 For selecting a song to play back or edit. ) [FILE/SONG SETTING] button........pages 39, 82 For saving recorded songs and managing song files. Also lets you make detailed settings for song recording and playback. ! METRONOME [ON/OFF], METRONOME [SETTING] buttons ...................pages 30, 77, 85 For using the metronome functions. @ TEMPO [UP] [DOWN] buttons.............. page 30 ¢ Soft pedal (left), Sostenuto pedal (center), Damper pedal (right)............................ page 24 For producing a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. These pedals can also be assigned to various functions. ∞ [PHONES] jacks...................................... page 16 For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones, allowing private practice. § USB [TO HOST] terminal....................... page 72 For changing the tempo (speed) of the song and metronome. For connecting the instrument to your computer, allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and the computer. # A – D [–] [+] buttons, Display............... page 12 ¶ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals........ page 72 $ [CONTRAST] knob................................. page 15 For adjusting the display contrast. % [EXIT] button......................................... page 13 Pressing this button returns to the main operation display (the one shown when the power is turned on). ^ Voice group buttons............................. page 23 For choosing voice groups. Sixteen groups of voices, including grand piano, are available. You can also combine two voices and use them together. & [VOICE SETTING] button ...............pages 78, 86 For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of various MIDI functions. • [AUX PEDAL] jack.................................. page 72 For connecting an optional pedal, allowing convenient foot control over one of a variety of assignable functions. ª AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ....................... page 73 For connecting an external tone generator, allowing you to play the sound of that device via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. ‚ AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks.................... page 73 For making detailed changes to the voice sound and effects. For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to external powered speaker systems, for playing in large venues at higher volumes. * [SPLIT] button ....................................... page 28 ⁄ [LAN] port ............................................. page 74 For playing different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. ( [REVERB], [CHORUS] buttons............... page 26 For adding reverb and chorus effects to the sound. º BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] buttons ............................................................... page 25 For adjusting the brightness of the sound. Introduction Panel Controls and Terminals By directly connecting the CLP-380 to the Internet, you can use the special service on the Yamaha website that enables you to automatically play back a wide variety of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music directly on your instrument. ¤ [AC IN] connector.................................. page 15 For connection of the power cord. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 11 Introduction to the Controls This instrument has many buttons and controls—so many that you may feel overwhelmed at first. However, once you understand the basic operations, you’ll find the instrument is very easy to use. Press the button corresponding to the function you want to use. Introduction The buttons are the means of entrance to the functions. For example, when you want to change a voice, you simply press one of the voice group buttons on the right of the panel, or when you want to listen to a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button on the left of the panel. For the functions that are assigned to each button, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” on page 10. GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE When you press a button, related content or parameter is shown in the display. For example, when you press a voice button, the voice name is shown, or when you press the [SONG SELECT] button, a song name is shown on the display. After pressing a button, check the display for the indication. A B Grand Piano 1 NO C YES D Selecting items/parameters with the buttons on the side of the display. Each function may have many items or parameters from which you can choose. To select an item or parameter, press one of the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. Each parameter in the display corresponds to the A [–][+] – D [–][+] button next to it. A B GrandPiano1 Vibraphone Harpsi.8' WoodBass NO C YES D ■ To reset the values or parameters, press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously. If you’ve changed the parameter values or settings, you may wan to reset them to their normal condition. To do this, simply press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously. A B MetronomeVolume NO YES 100 C D The TEMPO and BRILLIANCE buttons are the same shape as the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. You can reset the related values or parameters by simultaneously pressing buttons of this shape. 12 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Introduction to the Controls ■ To execute or cancel the operation, press the B [+ (YES)] / B [– (NO)] button. When a prompt is shown on the upper right of the display, press the B [+ (YES)] / B [– (NO)] button to execute or cancel the operation. Introduction YES: execute NO: cancel B A Save Overwrite?--> M-001:NewSong001.MID NO YES D C Press the [EXIT] button to exit from a function. The [EXIT] button is the means to “leave” a function. After you’ve used a function and want to exit from it, press the [EXIT] button. [EXIT] button CONTRAST B NO YES EXIT D CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 13 Before Using the Clavinova About the key cover To open the key cover: Introduction Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. About the music rest To raise the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. To lower the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. About the music braces These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To open 14 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual To close Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on 1. Connect the power cable. 1-1 1-2 Introduction First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. For an illustration of the location of the [AC IN] connector, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” (page 10). In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) (rear panel) WARNING Make sure your CLP-380 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-380. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-380 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-380. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. TIP [POWER] switch Power indicator Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. CAUTION A Even when the instrument is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time or during electrical storms, make sure you unplug the AC power plug from the wall AC outlet. B Grand Piano 1 NO C YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. The screen and the power indicator turn off. Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. A CONTRAST B NO YES TERMINOLOGY EXIT C D Use this knob. Contrast Difference between brightness and darkness. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 15 Before Using the Clavinova Setting the volume To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actually produce sound while you adjust the volume. Introduction The level decreases. The level increases. TERMINOLOGY CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP MIN You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX [OUT] output level using the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. MAX MASTER VOLUME Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) Bottom surface CAUTION Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. Standard stereo phone plug Using the Headphone Hanger You can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as shown in the illustration. TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged. Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment The CLP-380 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the rear of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound. In order to take full advantage of iAFC, perform the automatic adjustment (page 92). 16 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Basic Operation For each voice group, the Clavinova contains one demo song that shows off the character of the voices. This section explains how to listen to the demo songs for the voice groups listed below. Demonstration tunes Tunes Composer GRAND PIANO1 Albumbrad, Lyriske stykker IV, op.47-2 E. H. Grieg HARPSICHORD Concerto a cembalo obbligato, 2 violini, viola e continuo No.7, BWV.1058 J. S. Bach CHURCH ORGAN Herr Christ, der ein'ge Gottes-Sohn, BWV.601 J. S. Bach Basic Operation Voice group The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original compositions. All other songs are original (©2008 Yamaha Corporation). 3 Voice group buttons 2 4 Procedure 1. Turn the power on. (In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power on. Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] dial about half way between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to the most comfortable listening level. 2. Engage the demo mode. TERMINOLOGY Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The indicators of the voice group buttons will blink in succession. A B VoiceDemo SelectVoiceButton C 3. NO D Select a tune and start playback. The indicator of the voice group button you pressed will light, and the demo song will begin playing. Subsequently, the demo songs will play back consecutively from the upper left voice group button until you stop the playback. Stop the playback and exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button. A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. YES Press the voice group button for the demo song that you want to hear. 4. Mode: TIP To adjust the volume balance between the song playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard, use the [SONG BALANCE] slider (page 38). TIP You can also exit from demo mode by pressing the [EXIT] or [STOP] button. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 17 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Hearing the piano demo (using sampling technology) and iAFC demo By holding down the [DEMO] button and pressing the A [+] button to call up the “Piano Demo” display, you can hear and compare how the piano demo sounds with and without the sampling technology and iAFC demo, by turning iAFC on/off. The demo songs are assigned to the voice group buttons as follows. Sampling technology/ iAFC demo Basic Operation Piano demo Voice group buttons Stereo Piano (Stereo Sampling) GRAND PIANO 1 Mono Piano (Mono Sampling) GRAND PIANO 2 Sustain (Sustain Sampling) With E.PIANO1 Without E.PIANO 2 KeyOff (Key-off Sampling) With HARPSICHORD Without E.CLAVICHORD StringRes (String Resonance) iAFC demo 18 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual With VIBRAPHONE Without GUITAR iAFC With CHURCH ORGAN Without JAZZ ORGAN Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 19) or use them for practice (page 21). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” booklet that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Playing the 50 piano preset songs 1-2 43 2 Basic Operation 1-1 5 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] button Procedure 1. Call up the Song Select screen. TERMINOLOGY Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. 1-1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button. 1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the “PRESET” song type. Song select screen A B PRESET BAR 001 P-001:Invention No.1 C NO YES D The song number appears on the display. PRESET .........Stands for Preset song memory. This memory contains 50 piano preset songs. 2. Select the desired song. Press the C [–][+] buttons to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 19 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 3. TIP Play a preset song. • [-----: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance (page 31). Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. The number of measures A • You can repeatedly play back a single song or specify a range (in beats) within a song for repeated playback by using the [REPEAT] button (page 22). Use the “SongRepeat” parameter in the [FILE/SONG SETTING] menu to repeat playback of all songs (page 82). B PRESET BAR 015 P-001:Invention No.1 NO C YES D Adjusting the tempo Basic Operation TIP You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen. A NO YES 86 C TIP Use the D [–][+] buttons to scroll through the song name, if the name does not fit in the display. B Tempo You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. TIP D You can also use the D [–][+] buttons to change the tempo. TIP 4. Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. Press the C [–] button during playback to start playback from the previous song. Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Press the [STOP] button or simultaneously press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons during playback or while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 5. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. 20 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 23) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part is played by [LEFT]. Basic Operation 1 32 Procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) You can cause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Sync Start). Hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/ PAUSE] indicator will blink, and the Clavinova will wait for Sync Start. Now when you play the keyboard, playback will begin at the same moment. If you press the [STOP] button while waiting, Sync Start will be cancelled. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TERMINOLOGY Sync: Synchronous; occurring at the same time. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 21 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing with the Repeat Playback function and the preset songs The Song Repeat functions can be used to repeatedly play back a song or a specific range of measures in a song. This is useful for repeated practicing of difficult-to-play phrases. Playing back a song repeatedly Basic Operation Procedure 1. TIP You can repeatedly play back all songs from the 50 preset songs or from the USB storage devices (page 82). Enter the Repeat mode. Select a song to practice, then press the [REPEAT] button. 2. Start Repeat playback. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 3. Exit the Repeat mode and return to the normal play mode. Press the [STOP] button to stop playback, then press the [REPEAT] button. Specifying a range of measures and playing them back repeatedly (A-B repeat) Procedure 1. Select the desired song for practicing and play it. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. 2. Specify the repeat range. Press the [REPEAT] button at the starting point (A) of the range to be repeated. Press the [REPEAT] button again at the ending point (B). After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly, TIP Specifying the repeat range between point A and the end of the song. Specifying only point A results in repeat playback between point A and the end of the song. TIP 3. Cancel the specified range and return to the normal play mode. Press the [REPEAT] button. 22 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the repeat function is turned off. Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices 1 Voice group buttons 2 1. TERMINOLOGY Select a voice group. Voice Press a voice group button. 2. On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” TIP Select a voice. Use A [–][+] buttons to select a voice. Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name GRANDPIANO1 GrandPiano1 MellowPiano RockPiano HonkyTonkPiano GrandPiano2 BrightPiano E.Piano1 SynthPiano E.Piano2 Vintage E.Piano Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' E.Clavichord Wah Clavi. Vibraphone Marimba Celesta NylonGuitar SteelGuitar CHURCHORGAN PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganTutti PipeOrganFlute 1 PipeOrganFlute 2 JazzOrgan RotaryOrgan MellowOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat SynthPad 1 SynthPad 2 WoodBass Bass&Cymbal ElectricBass FretlessBass XGVoice GRANDPIANO2 E.PIANO1 E.PIANO2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR Basic Operation Procedure JAZZORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH.PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG You can also switch between voices in the same group by pressing a voice group button repeatedly. TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 17). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 114 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 114. For details on XG voices, refer to “XG voice list” (the separate data list booklet). If you select XG XG voices are categorized and included in separate folders. You can select the XG voice group first, then select the desired voice. 2-1 Simultaneously press the [–][+] screen buttons located beside the XG voice name display, to access a screen where you can select XG voices. TIP XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. 2-2 Use A [–][+] buttons to select the voice group. 2-3 Use C [–][+] buttons to select the desired voice. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 23 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Basic Operation Damper (right) pedal When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive halfpedal function. TIP When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the [PEDAL] jack on the unit (see step 6 on page 119). Also, make sure that the RPedalFunc parameter in the “FUNCTION” menu is set to ON (see page 96). TERMINOLOGY Half-pedal: While playing the piano with Sustain and you want to slightly mute the sustained sound, release the damper pedal from maximum position to half position. Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. TIP The threshold at which the Half Pedal effect starts can be set from the Half Pedal Point parameter in the Function menu (page 98). When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone, Jazz Organ and Mellow Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 98.) TIP You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “FUNCTION” menu. (See page 99.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “RPedalFunc”, “CPedalFunc”, and “LPedalFunc” parameters in the “FUNCTION” menu. (See page 96.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/stop operation (PLAY/PAUSE function) via the “PedalPlay/Pause” parameter in the “FUNCTION” menu (on page 98). 24 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [CHORUS] button Basic Operation [REVERB] button BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] button [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B Brilliance NO YES Normal C D TIP You can press BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] buttons, and then use D [–][+] buttons to select the desired tonality. TIP Normal setting = Normal TERMINOLOGY Mellow3 Mellow2 Mellow1 Soft and mellow tone. The sound becomes more mellow and rounder as the number increases. Normal.......... Standard tone. Bright1 Bright2 Bright tone. The sound becomes brighter as the number increases. Bright3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. TIP If you select [Bright1], [Bright2] or [Bright3] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 25 Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 88.) Basic Operation TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 89). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. 26 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Chorus Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 89.) TIP Normal Setting: The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 116 for examples of effective voice combinations. The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. 2 2 1 3 Voice group buttons 3 2 Basic Operation The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different group. 1 4 Voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. TIP Press two voice group buttons simultaneously. Voice 1 Voice 2 A B GrandPiano1 Vibraphone C 2. If you want to select Dual mode for the left-hand area when the entire keyboard is divided into left and right areas (page 28), hold down [SPLIT] button and simultaneously press two voice group buttons. NO YES D TIP Refer to page 23 for details on how to select XG voices. Select a voice. Use the A [–][+] buttons and B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to select a voice. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 114 are called voice 1, and those listed in the bottom row are called voice 2. 3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any voice group button. Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure 1. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired voice group button. 2. Select a voice. Use the A [–][+] buttons to select a voice. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 27 Selecting and Playing Voices 3. TIP Select another voice. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons repeatedly. A B E.Piano1 SynthPiano NO C Basic Operation 4. If you want to select Dual mode for the left-hand area when the entire keyboard is divided into left and right areas (page 28), press D [–] [+] buttons. YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any voice group button. Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the [WOOD BASS] or [E. BASS] voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 116 for examples of effective voice combinations. 23 2 3 4 Voice group buttons 1345 Procedure 1. Enter Split mode. Press the [SPLIT] button. 2. Select a voice for the right hand. Use the voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select the voice for the right-hand area. 3. Select a voice for the left hand. Hold down the [SPLIT] button, and press a voice group button to select the voice group for the left-hand area. Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a voice. 28 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP Refer to page 23 for details on how to select XG voice. Selecting and Playing Voices 4. Specify the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range). The normal setting of the split point is “F#2.” TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. TIP The split point can also be set by the [FUNCTION] parameter [SplitPoint] (page 96). F#2 Center “C” Basic Operation To change the split point setting: Hold down the [SPLIT] button, then use the D [–][+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B SplitPoint NO YES F#2 C D Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the [SPLIT] button. You can use Dual (see page 27) in each area (right-hand and left-hand) of Split mode. A B GrandPiano1 Vibraphone C Harpsi.8' WoodBass NO YES D CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 29 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. 12 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] buttons Basic Operation Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. Adjusting the tempo TIP Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) A B Tempo NO YES 120 C D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 5 – 500), use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] or the D [–][+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons or the D [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. 30 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 85.) Recording Your Performance This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the righthand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen parts separately, you could record the left- and righthand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT connector. (See page 73.) TERMINOLOGY Basic Operation Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 104 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song There are two ways to record your performance: recording it quickly without specifying a recording part, or recording several different parts to multiple parts. You can select whichever way best suits your purpose. ■ Recording a performance without specifying the recording part (page 32) This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without specifying the recording parts—useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces. In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to part 1 (right part). ■ Recording a performance of several different parts (page 35) This lets you record the right, left and extra parts separately. Since you can record the left part while playing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet. Since you can record up to sixteen parts separately, record the performance of each instrument part one by one and create fully orchestrated compositions. EXTRA PARTS LEFT RIGHT Part 1 [RIGHT] corresponds to part 1. Record the right-hand part to [RIGHT]. Part 2 [LEFT] corresponds to part 2. Record the left-hand part to [LEFT]. Part 3 Part 4 TIP Appropriate channels (parts) in the song will automatically be assigned to [RIGHT] and [LEFT]. Therefore, [RIGHT] may be assigned to a part other than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a part other than Part 2. TIP If a “MemoryFull” message or “SystemLimit” message appears after recording your performance, refer to the section “Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save]” on page 42. [EXTRA PARTS] corresponds to part 3 – 16. Record parts 3-16 in addition to part 1 and 2 when you are recording a song which has many parts, such as a symphony orchestra. Part 16 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 31 Recording Your Performance Recording a performance without specifying the recording part 2 13 45 Basic Operation Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. TIP Press the [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously. If you select a song other than “-----:NewSong” and record on a part that already has data, the existing data on the part will be lost. “NewSong” screen A B -----------------:NewSong BAR 001 NO C 2. YES D Select a voice. TIP Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 23). Set the tempo in Step 3. Set the other parameters, such as reverb, chorus and Song Balance. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the dial to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once to return to the “NewSong” screen. 3. Engage the record mode. Press the [REC] button. The [REC] and [RIGHT] indicators flash in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B SongRecording -----:NewSong C BAR 001 NO YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once. 32 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP See page 38 for more information on recording in Dual/Split mode. Recording Your Performance 4. TIP Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Using the metronome You can record data while using the metronome. To do this, turn the metronome on before step 4. The metronome is not recorded. TIP Record screen B SongRecording -----:NewSong BAR 012 NO C YES TIP D Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to Storage memory (page 39). When saving is completed, the Storage memory screen appears. A When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. To return the location to the start of the song, press the [REC] button, again. TIP Rename songs The recorded songs are named automatically, but you can rename songs as you like (page 43). B SAVE Executing -----:NewSong001.MID C 5. To stop recording in the middle of a song, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. To resume recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again or play a note on the keyboard. Basic Operation A NO YES D Play back the recorded performance. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. If you’ve recorded a passage of silence prior to the first note on step 4, and want to play from top of the measure (including that silence or rests), set the “QuickPlay” function to OFF (page 83). When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Re-recording a song partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Procedure 1. Select a recording method. 1-1 Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button. 1-2 Press the A [–][+] buttons to display “RecStart” or “RecEnd.” CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 33 Recording Your Performance 1-3 Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify how the recording should start and end. Starting methods: Normal: The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. FirstKeyOn: Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. Ending methods: Replace: The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. PunchOut: The data after the point you stop recording will remain. Basic Operation 2. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. If the playback screen is not displayed, press the [SONG SELECT] button once. A B MEMORY BAR 009 M-001:NewSong001.MID C 3. NO YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 32 if you wish to change the previous settings. 4. Engage record mode. Press the [REC] button. To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button. After pressing the [REC] button again or the [STOP] button when “RecStart” is set to “Normal” (page 34), “Overwrite?” is shown in the display. To cancel this and not overwrite, press the B [– (NO)] button. 5. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. 6. Save the recorded songs. When you stop recording, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song. To cancel overwriting, press the B [– (NO)] button. 34 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TERMINOLOGY “Overwrite?->”: Do you wish to overwrite the song? Recording Your Performance Recording a performance of several different parts 2 2 1 13 Procedure Basic Operation TIP Set the tempo in Step 2. 1. Select “New Song” and a voice for recording. TIP Follow the same operation steps as in “Recording a performance without specifying the recording part” above. Refer to steps 1 – 2 on page 32. 2. See page 38 for more information on recording in Dual/Split mode. Specify the recording parts and engage the record mode. Record to the right (part 1) or left (part 2) part: Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button. Record to the extra parts (part 3 – 16): Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button and press the A [–][+] button to display “RecExtraPartsCh.” Press the D [–][+] buttons to specify a recording part. The specified part is assigned to the [EXTRA PARTS] button. After specifying the recorded part to the [EXTRA PARTS] button, press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [EXTRA PARTS] button. The [REC] and specified part indicators flash in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B SongRecording -----:NewSong C BAR 001 NO YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press the [SONG SELECT] button once. If you don’t want to hear the right/left part while you record, press the [RIGHT]/ [LEFT] button so that its indicator is turned off. 3. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. As soon as recording is stopped, the song is automatically saved to Storage memory (page 39). When saving is completed, the Storage memory screen appears. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 35 Recording Your Performance Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “-----: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001 – P-050], commercially-available music data <see page 50>, or your old recorded performances <see page 39>). Basic Operation Procedure 1. Select a song to be recorded over. To select a preset song, press the [SONG SELECT] button, then press the A [–][+] buttons to display “PRESET.” To select a song, press the C [–][+] buttons. To select a song from commercially available music data or from already-recorded data, press the A [–][+] buttons to display “MEMORY” or “USB1” in the Song Select screen and press the C [–][+] buttons. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a performance without specifying the recording part” from pages 32 to 34. When you record over a preset song, the song is automatically saved to Storage memory (page 39) when the recording stopped. When you record over a song of commercially available music data or of alreadyrecorded data, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or not (when recording is stopped). Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song. 36 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP If you record on a part that already has data, the existing data on the part will be lost. Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. Procedure 3. Select a song you wish to change (page 36). To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change by using the B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] buttons while the playback screen is displayed or by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to rerecord. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.Piano2, use the voice group buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press the [SONG SELECT] button once to return to the song select screen. 4. TIP Before changing a voice or tempo, set the starting method to “Normal” (page 33). When the starting method is set to “FirstKeyOn,” you cannot change a voice or tempo. Basic Operation 1. 2. TIP Refer to “What type of data is recorded?” on page 108 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The panel settings on Step 3 will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the part to change. The indicator for the selected part lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. When you exit record mode, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the song or not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the song. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 37 Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Procedure 1. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider to the left or right to make adjustments. Basic Operation SONG KEYBOARD TIP Some commercially-available music data contains extremely high volumes. When using such data, please adjust the song balance. SONG BALANCE The song playback volume will be lower. Your playing volume will be lower. Recording in Dual or Split mode TIP When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate part. The following table shows how parts are assigned to each voice. Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. CAUTION When you record multiple parts one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 36), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, RIGHT, LEFT, and EXTRA PARTS n have been selected for recording. Parts assigned for recording MAIN (voice 1) Parts used for recording Dual LEFT (voice 2) LEFT EXTRA PART n RIGHT LEFT EXTRA PART n RIGHT LEFT EXTRA PART n ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ Part 1 Part 2 Part n – Part 3 Part 4 Part 1 Part n Part 1 Part n Part 2 Part n+1 Part 2 Part n+1 – Part 3 Part n+2 – Part 4 Part n+3 Part n+2 – Note: Part n = Part 3 – Part 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, Parts 1, 2, and 3 are used. 38 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Split+Dual RIGHT LEFT (voice 1) MAIN (voice 2) Split Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] File screens (accessed via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button) enables you to handle files (e.g., save, delete and rename recorded songs), copy and format medias and change characters on the screen. To connect to a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122. The following parameters are provided for these operations: Reference page Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 42 Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device Delete 43 Renaming files Rename 43 Copying files Copy 44 Moving files Move 45 Making folders (directories) in the USB storage device MakeDir 45 Formatting a USB storage device Format 46 TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Basic Operation Parameter name Settings Memory Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 46 Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 47 Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Character code Type of characters CAUTION Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded from USB storage device. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, Storage memory, or USB storage device, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. However, recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory. In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song,” and a song on a USB storage device is an “External song.” Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory USB storage device CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 39 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Song types This instrument handles various types of songs. Letters and song numbers are displayed to the left of the song name. The letters indicate the different song types as follows: Preset song memory P...............Preset songs Storage memory Basic Operation M .............Memory songs MP ...........Protected songs such as preset songs saved to Storage memory, or Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs, and Disklavier Piano Soft songs in the Storage memory. MS, Ms ....Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in the Storage memory. USB storage device U1 ............External song U1P..........External songs such as Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) songs or Disklavier Piano Soft songs in a USB storage device. U1S, U1s..Yamaha-protection-formatted songs in a USB storage device. Limitation of file operations TIP Ø: Yes ˛: No Song types P M, U1 MS, Ms, U1S, U1s Save Ø*1 Ø Ø*1 ˛ Delete ˛ Ø Ø*2 Ø Rename ˛ Ø Ø*2 Ø Copy Ø*1 Ø Ø*1 ˛ Move ˛ Ø ˛ Ø*3 *1 Only to Storage memory *2 Only MP songs *3 Only between Storage memory and USB storage memory 40 MP, U1P CLP-380 Owner’s Manual U1 song with the “.SME” extension can only be deleted — cannot execute other file operations at left. Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 104 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take. 3 4 23 4 4 5 Procedure → TIP The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to shift to the upper level. Prepare for handling file(s). Prepare for handling files as follows. To use “Rename,” “Copy” or “Move”: Select a song via the [SONG SELECT] button referring to the section “Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs” (page 19) and “Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data” (page 48). To use “MakeDir”: Select the USB storage device via the [SONG SELECT] button referring to the section “Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data” (page 48). To use “Save,” “Delete,” “Format,” “SongAutoOpen” or “CharacterCode”: No need to perform any operations in this step. 2. → 1. Basic Operation 1 CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Access the File/Song Setting menu. Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button. A B Save Selected?--> M-002:NewSong002.MID /C NO YES D To close the File/Song Setting menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. Press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] or A [–][+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)], C [–][+], D [–][+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. TERMINOLOGY “Overwrite?→”: Do you wish to overwrite the song? “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: 5. Close the File/Song Setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 41 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save] Recorded songs are automatically saved to Storage memory from Current memory, so normally you won’t need to save songs using this function. However, if a “MemoryFull” message or “SystemLimit” message appear, save the song to another device using this function. A CAUTION B Save Selected?--> M-001:NewSong001.MID /C NO YES D Basic Operation Do not turn off the power before the save operation is completed. If you turn off the power to the Clavinova before the save operation is completed, the recorded song will be lost. Procedure See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Select a save destination. → → Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a save destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a save destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to fix it. Then press the B [+ (YES)] button to display “Execute?→.” TIP The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to shift to the upper level. 4-2 Name the song. To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character at the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 46 one-byte or 23 two-byte characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–][+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. 4-3 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. The song is automatically numbered. TIP You can change the type of characters on the screen using the “CharacterCode” parameter. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 42 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device ... [Delete] This deletes a song from Storage memory or from a USB storage device. It is not possible to delete a preset song or current song. TIP B C YES D The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to shift to the upper level. Basic Operation NO → Delete Execute?--> U1-001:NewSong001 /- → A TIP Procedure After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. TIP 4-1 Press the C [–][+] buttons to select a song to delete. When you delete a folder, all files within that folder will be deleted. CAUTION 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. Renaming files ... [Rename] You can change a song’s title except for the preset songs and [-----: NewSong]. TIP B Rename Execute?--> M-001:NewSong001 C NO YES D See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. To rename a folder, select “Rename” then select the folder by pressing the [SONG SELECT] button and the C [–][+] buttons. (The folder name is shown after “DIR:.”) To select another level in this display, press the D [–][+] buttons. (Other levels can be selected when “ / ” is shown in the display.) After that, select “Rename” again and rename the folder. → Procedure To rename a folder → A TIP 4. Name the song as described in the “Save” section (page 42). After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 43 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Copying files ... [Copy] You can copy songs. However, you cannot copy files to the same root directory or same folder. A TIP B Copy Execute?--> U1-001:NewaSong001 /- NO C YES Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. D TERMINOLOGY Root: The highest level of a hierarchical structure. This indicates an area which does not belong to a folder. Basic Operation Copy operation You can copy files to other memory location. Can be copied. File A File A Can be copied. File B File B Storage memory USB storage device You can copy files to a folder but not on the same root directory. File A Can be copied. File A Folder Cannot be copied. File B USB storage device Procedure TIP Protected songs cannot be copied. See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4-1 When you copy a song to/from a USB storage device, make sure that a USB storage device is connected to the instrument. TIP Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. TIP You cannot copy a folder. press the C [–][+] buttons to select a copy destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a copy destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to fix it. 4-3 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. 44 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual → 4-2 Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and → TIP The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to shift to the upper level. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Moving files ... [Move] You can move (cut and paste) songs. A B Move Execute?--> U1-001:NewSong001 /- NO C YES D Procedure Basic Operation TIP Preset songs and some protected songs cannot be moved. See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. TIP You cannot move a folder. 4-1 When you move a song to/from a USB storage device, Press the D [–] button to display “DriveSelected?→” and press the C [–][+] buttons to select a move destination (Storage memory or USB storage device). After selecting a move destination, press the B [+ (YES)] button to fix it. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. → TIP → make sure that a USB storage device is connected to the instrument. The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to shift to the upper level. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. Making folders in the USB storage device ... [MakeDir] You can create folders (directories) on the USB storage device to organize songs. This instrument enables you to create folders only in the USB storage device—not in the Preset song memory and Storage memory. A B MakeDir Execute?--> U1 :NewDir_ C NO TIP YES D Procedure See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4-1 Follow the steps “Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device” on page 42 to name the folder. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. The folder is created in the root directory in the USB1 (indicated by “U1” in this display) device. To make a folder for the selected drive or level To make a folder for the selected drive or level, select “MakeDir” then select “USB” by pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. In this display, press the A [–][+] button to select another drive. Press the D [–][+] button to select another level. After that, select “MakeDir” again and make a folder, following step 4 at left. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. TERMINOLOGY Root: The highest level of a hierarchical structure. This indicates an area which does not belong to a folder. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 45 Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Formatting a USB storage device ... [Format] You can format media so that it can be used with the Clavinova. A B Format USB1 Execute?--> NO C YES D Basic Operation Procedure See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4-1 If some USB storage devices are recognized by the instrument, press the C [–][+] buttons to select a device. CAUTION 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. Do not turn off the power or eject the media while “Executing” is shown in the display. Automatically selecting a song in storage media ... [SongAutoOpen] Specify whether a song (not contain in a folder) which does not contain to a folder will automatically be opened when you insert the media. A SongAutoOpen NO YES On C Procedure See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4 46 Use D [–][+] button to select ON or OFF. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP B D When a USB storage device is connected to the instrument, a song in the device will not automatically open. A song is automatically opened only when media is inserted to a drive. Therefore, this function cannot be used for devices which do not use removable media—such as USB flash memory or hard disk drive. Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING] Changing the type of characters on screen ... [CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B CharacterCode NO YES Japanese D Basic Operation C Procedure See page 41 for information on basic operations. The following is a detailed procedure for step 4. 4 Use D [–][+] button to select International or Japanese. Options: International, Japanese Character list International Japanese CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 47 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 31) as well as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. TIP See page 50 for information on the types of song data that can be played on the Clavinova. TIP TIP Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200 – 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Change the Clavinova’s character type ([CharacterCode]) as appropriate for the selected song (page 47). Basic Operation Playing back a song If you want to play back an External song on this instrument, connect the USB storage device and insert the appropriate media into the device. Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122. 1-1 43 1-2 5 2 Procedure 1. TIP Display the song select screen. 1-1 Press the [SONG SELECT] button. 1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the song type: “MEMORY” or “USB1.” Song select screen A B USB1 Bar 001 U1-001:Song001.MID C NO YES D MEMORY .....Stands for Storage memory. This memory contains recorded songs or copied songs. “MEMORY” is not displayed when this memory does not contain any songs. USB1 .............Stands for USB storage device. This device contains commercially available song data, etc. “USB1” is not displayed when the USB storage device is not connected to the instrument. When several USB storage devices are recognized to the instrument, numbers are added after “USB,” like “USB1,” “USB2”... The numbers are not fixed and may change according to the order in which the devices are connected and disconnected. 48 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a four-handed song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. TIP You can repeat playback a single song via the [Repeat] button (page 22) or repeat playback all songs by using the “SongRepeat” function (page 82). Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 2. TIP Select the desired song. Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a song or folder. Letters indicating song types and song numbers are shown on the left of the song names, while letters indicating song types are shown on the left of folder names. In addition, folders are indicated by “DIR” at the left of the corresponding name. See page 40 for details regarding the letters used to indicate song types. If the song name extends beyond what can be displayed in the screen, you can press the D [+] button to move toward the right in steps of one character. Press the D [–] button to move back to the left in steps of one character. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Sync Start” function. To enter Sync Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Sync Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Sync Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B USB1 Bar 005 U1-001:Song001.MID C NO YES Basic Operation Start playback. → 3. → TIP The “ ” and “ ” indicators may be displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to shift to the upper level. TIP It is a good idea to shorten long folder names (i.e., over 13 characters) on your computer before using them. See "Troubleshooting" (page 111) for more details regarding the display of folder names. TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. TIP D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the [SONG BALANCE] slider. (See page 38.) Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Press the C [–] button during playback to start playback from the previous song. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen. Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to return to the song select screen. 4. Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Playback pauses when you press the button. 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 49 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data Turning part playback on and off While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these part buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those parts will not be played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the “SongRepeat (page 82)” and “PhraseMark (page 82)” parameters in the “FILE/SONG SETTING” menu. TIP Basic Operation Appropriate channels (parts) in the song will automatically be assigned to [RIGHT] and [LEFT]. Therefore, [RIGHT] may be assigned to a part other than Part 1, or [LEFT] to a part other than Part 2. Supported song data type Data formats that can be played on the CLP-380 The Clavinova CLP-380 plays song data in the following formats: Sequence format • SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1 • ESEQ TERMINOLOGY Sequence format: A structured method for recording performance data. Performance data recorded on the CLP-380 is saved as SMF format 0. Voice arrangement format • XG voice arrangement • GM system level 1 voice arrangement • GM system level 2 voice arrangement • DOC voice arrangement Performance data recorded with preset XG voices on the CLP-380 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. See the separate “Data List” for the XG voice list. Floppy disk format • 3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format • 3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format Refer to “Data Compatibility” on page 112 for more information on formats. 50 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TERMINOLOGY Voice arrangement format: A structured method for numbering the voices for assignment. TIP This instrument can play GS format songs. However, the voices may not be completely the same as used in the original. TERMINOLOGY Disk format: A structured method for writing data to disk. Internet Direct Connection (IDC) This feature lets you directly connect your instrument to the Internet. A service in the special Yamaha website enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres. For the latest services, refer to the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Basic Operation Here in this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the “Glossary of Terms (IDC)” on page 67. In addition, since information and confirmation messages sometimes appear on the screen to facilitate operation, you can refer to the “Message List (IDC)” on page 64 and “Message List” on page 104 for an explanation of the messages, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Connecting the Instrument to the Internet You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. Procedure 1. Select the connection environment of your computer from the following. Connection environment CAUTION Due to EU regulations, users within Europe should use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent electromagnetic interference. TIP Depending on the Internet connection, you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect with the instrument. If in doubt, check your contract or contact your provider. Reference page Using a Cable Connection (Using DHCP) page 52 Using a Wireless LAN (Using a Wireless Game Adaptor; using DHCP) page 52 Using a Wireless LAN (Using a USB Wireless LAN Adaptor; using DHCP) page 53 Using a Cable Connection (Using Static IP Address, Proxy Server) Using a Wireless LAN (Using Static IP Address, Proxy Server) page 57 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 51 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Using a Cable Connection (Using DHCP) 2. Connect the devices according to the example. First turn the power of the instrument off, then connect the LAN cable to the [LAN] port on the instrument, and finally turn the power on again. Connection example: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router) TIP Basic Operation Modem* Router No router capability LAN cable Cable type For an illustration of the location of the [LAN] port, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” (page 10). TIP LAN cable [LAN] port * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Some types of modems require an optional Ethernet hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). Connection example: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) Modem* LAN cable with router LAN cable [LAN] port * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. 3. Connect the instrument to the Internet. You do not need to make Internet settings. You can access the Internet simply by connecting a router or a modem equipped with a router to the instrument via a LAN cable. You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70. Using a Wireless LAN (Using a Wireless Game Adaptor; using DHCP) 2. Connect the devices according to the example. First turn the power of the instrument off, then connect the wireless game adaptor to the [LAN] port on the instrument, and finally turn the power on again. 52 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP The most common router and modem equipped with a router have a DHCP function. Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Connection example: Wireless connection (using a wireless game adaptor) Access point TIP Wireless game adaptor * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. 3. [LAN] port Connect the instrument to the Internet. You do not need to make Internet settings. You can access the Internet simply by connecting a wireless game adaptor to the instrument. You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70. For a list of wireless game adaptors whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha, refer to the website: http://music.yamaha.com/ download/ TIP In addition to the modem or an access point, this connection requires a router. Basic Operation Modem* TIP For an illustration of the location of the [LAN] port, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” (page 10). TIP The wireless game adaptor requires settings such as the access point. For information about how to make settings, read the owner's manual for the product you are using. Using a Wireless LAN (Using a USB Wireless LAN Adaptor; using DHCP) For important information on the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, refer to the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122. 2. Connect the devices according to the example. First turn the power of the instrument off, then connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal on the instrument, and finally turn the power on again. TIP For an illustration of the location of the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, see “Panel Controls and Terminals” (page 10). TIP Connection example: Wireless connection (using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) Modem* Access point For a list of USB wireless LAN adaptors whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha, refer to the website: http://music.yamaha.com/ download/ TIP In addition to the modem or an access point, this connection requires a router. USB wireless LAN adaptor USB [TO DEVICE] terminal * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. 3. TIP This instrument is encrypted in WEP format only. Connect the instrument to the Internet. You’ll need to make Internet settings on the instrument explained in the section “About the Internet Settings (settings concerning the access point)” on page 54. Making the Internet settings might take some time. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 53 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) About the Internet Settings (settings concerning the access point) When you use Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the first time, you should make the Internet settings on the instrument, then save all of the settings. Make a written note of the settings, in case you have to enter them again. Access point SSID Channel Encryption YES TIP You do not need to make Internet settings here if you are using a cable connection (using DHCP), a wireless LAN (using a wireless game adaptor; using DHCP), or a cable connection/wireless LAN (using static IP address, proxy server). NO Basic Operation TIP WEP key — About the confirmation and changes in the setting of the access point side, read the owner's manual for the product you are using. Searching for and selecting the access point TIP When searching for an access point, the display shows the access point(s) near the Clavinova. Once you select the desired access point, the SSID and channel are automatically set. The WEP key is not entered automatically. You have to enter it by yourself if you select an encrypted access point (key icon “ ” appears). 2 3-2 4-1 4-4 1 1 3-1 4-2 4-3 Procedure 1. Call up the Internet Settings screen. Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC] button. Internet Settings screen A B Wireless Execute?--> NetworkSearch C 54 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual NO YES D Confirm that the power of the access point is on. Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 2. Search for the access point(s). TIP Press the B [+(YES)] button to search for the access point(s). The access point(s) is displayed on the screen. A If no signal from the access point is received, the access point cannot be displayed. B Wireless Execute?--> NetworkSearch NO C YES D Basic Operation Access point(s) A B Wireless Select?--> :abcdefghijk(C01) NO C YES D :abcdefghijk(C01) Key icon 3. SSID Channel TIP Select the access point. 3-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to display the desired access point. 3-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to select the access point. If the access point extends beyond what can be displayed in the screen, you can press the D [+] button to move toward the right in one-character steps. Press the D [–] button to move back to the left in one-character steps. No key icon Because your access point is not an encrypted setting, you don’t need to make a setting for the WEP key. Please proceed to “Saving the Settings and Checking the Connection” on page 57. If you want to encrypt the access point, change this in the settings of the access point side. With key icon “ ” The display for inputting the WEP key is called up in step 4. 4. Input the WEP key. 4-1 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the WEP Key Input screen. WEP Key Input screen A B Wireless WEPkey: C Input?--> NO YES D CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 55 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) 4-2 Move the cursor to the desired point by using the C [–][+] buttons. 4-3 Select a character at the cursor by using the D [–][+] buttons. B A Wireless WEPkey:abcde _ Input?--> NO YES D C Basic Operation Cursor Insert a space TIP Move the cursor to the position you want to insert the space, and press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously. Delete a character TIP Move the cursor to the character you want to delete, and press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously. WEP key character list a~z A~Z @ . – – ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , / : ; < = > ? [ ¥ ] ^ ` { | } ~ 0~9 4-4 Set the WEP key input by using the B [+ (YES)] button. When you set the WEP key input, the characters are shown as “******.” A B Wireless ***** C Set?--> NO YES D 4-5 Actually enter the WEP key input by using the B [+ (YES)] button. 56 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual To cancel the WEP key input, press the B [– (NO)] button and return to the WEP Key Input screen. If the WEP key input is incorrect, reinput it. Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Saving the Settings and Checking the Connection Make sure to save any settings you have made or changed. Turning off the instrument before saving may result in loss of data. You can save the settings and check the connection. 5. CAUTION Save the settings and check the connection. Press the B [+ (YES)] button. After the settings are saved, the instrument automatically starts checking the connection. When the operation is finished, the results are displayed on the screen. A B Wireless Execute?--> Save&ConnectTest NO YES C D A B ConnectSucceeded OK--> NO C 6. Basic Operation Save the Settings and Check the Connection screen YES D Return to the Internet Settings screen. Press the B [– (NO)], B [+ (YES)], or [EXIT] button. 7. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70. Using a Cable Connection (Using Static IP Address, Proxy Server) / Using a Wireless LAN (Using Static IP Address, Proxy Server) Before using a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122. 2. Connect the devices according to the example. For information on connecting the devices, refer to the website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ 3. TIP This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the [SELECT] switch on the left of the panel to select the desired terminal. If you connect USB storage devices to both USB [TO DEVICE] terminals, the devices may not operate properly. Connect the instrument to the Internet. You’ll need to make Internet settings on the instrument explained in the section “About the Internet Settings” below. Making the Internet settings might take some time. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 57 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) About the Internet Settings When you use Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the first time, you should make the Internet settings according to the following illustration flow. This flow is shown to make you easily understand how to load the setting file created on the computer to your instrument. You won’t need to make any settings on your instrument. For details, refer to the Yamaha webpage: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Basic Operation Save the file to USB storage device Load the file to the instrument Special Yamaha website Create the Internet setting file USB Storage Device Creating the Internet Setting File Procedure 1. Create the Internet Setting File. You need to create the Internet setting file on the special Yamaha webpage using your computer. For information about how to create the file, read the instructions on the Yamaha webpage: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ 58 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP You do not need to make Internet settings here if you are using a cable connection (using DHCP), a wireless LAN (using a wireless game adaptor; using DHCP), or a wireless LAN (using a USB wireless LAN adaptor; using DHCP). Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Loading the Internet Setting Files This procedure lets you make Internet settings by loading the files created on the special Yamaha webpage to the instrument. 3 2. 2 Basic Operation 2 4 Call up the Internet Settings screen. Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC] button. Internet Settings screen A B Wireless Execute?--> NetworkSearch NO C 3. YES D Engage the Load mode. Make sure that the USB storage device containing the saved Internet setting file named “config.n21” is connected to the instrument, and then use the A [–][+] buttons. A B ConfigFile Import Execute?--> NO C 4. TIP You can create the Internet setting files (named “config.n21”) on the special Yamaha webpage. TIP YES Yamaha recommends that you back up the Internet setting files (page 103). D Start loading. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to call up the confirmation message (“Sure?-->”). A B ConfigFile Import C Sure?--> NO YES D To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and data loading starts. When loading is complete, a “Completed” message appears for three seconds, followed by the Check the Connection screen. Please proceed to “Checking the Connection” on page 60. To cancel the loading, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 59 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Checking the Connection 5. Check the connection. Press the B [+ (YES)] button. Check the Connection screen A B ConfigFile Execute?--> ConnectTest YES Basic Operation C D A B ConnectSucceeded OK--> C 6. NO NO YES D Return to the Internet Settings screen. Press the B [– (NO)], B [+ (YES)], or [EXIT] button. 7. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. You can play back songs from the Internet. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 70. 60 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Calling Up the Connection Information This lets you confirm LAN connection environment, IP address acquisition status, Time acquisition status, and the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor; using DHCP) for the current connection. 1-2 1-1 Basic Operation 1-1 2 Procedure 1. Call up the Connection Information screen. 1-1 Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC] button. A B Wireless Execute?--> NetworkSearch NO C YES D 1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons. Connection Information screen A B ConnectInf Display Execute?--> NO C YES D If “Display” does not appear in the lower left of the screen, use the C [–][+] buttons to call up “Display.” 2. Call up the connection information. TIP Press the B [+ (YES)] button. A B ConnectInf Execute?--> Display:Device=OK(Port) C NO YES D Indication If the connection information extends beyond what can be displayed in the screen, you can press the D [+] button to move toward the right in one-character steps. Press the D [–] button to move back to the left in onecharacter steps. Meaning Device = LAN connection environment IP = IP address acquisition status Time = Time acquisition status Strength = Field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor; using DHCP) The connection information is not displayed, depending on the state of the connection, and is indicated as “NoInfo.” CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 61 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Exporting the Connection Information This procedure lets you export the detailed information on the current connection as a text file to a USB flash storage device. You can check the information on your computer. 2 Basic Operation 1 3 1 Procedure 1. TIP Call up the screen below. Hold down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button, and press the [REC] button. A B Wireless Execute?--> NetworkSearch NO C 2. YES D Turn on the Export mode. Make sure that a USB flash storage device is connected to the instrument, and then press the A [–][+] button. A B ConnectInf Export Execute?--> C NO YES D If the “Export” does not appear in the lower left of the screen, press the C [–][+] buttons to call up “Export.” 3. Start exporting. Press the B [+ (YES)] button. Overwriting the Connection Information A “Overwrite?-->” message will appear on the display if a USB storage device contains a file with the same name as the one you exported before. To overwrite, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the Clavinova overwrites the data. When overwriting is complete, a “Completed” message appears for three seconds, before returning to the previous screen. To cancel overwriting, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button. 62 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual The connection information file does not allow you to manually make Internet settings (pages 53 and 57). The connection information file is set to “read only” and cannot be edited. Internet Direct Connection (IDC) B A ConnectInf Overwrite?--> Export NO YES C D A B ConnectInf Export Completed NO C YES Basic Operation D After exporting, connect the USB storage device to your computer, and then open the text file “ConnectionInfo.txt” in the root directory of the USB storage device to check the detailed connection information. Restoring the Internet Settings to Normal (Default) Settings Turn on the power while simultaneously holding down the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button and [PLAY/PAUSE] button to restore the Internet settings to default settings. A TIP B FactorySet Executing InternetSetting C NO YES D The Internet settings are not restored to the default settings when using the “Restoring the normal (default) settings” operation on page 102. TIP CAUTION Restoring the instrument resets all Internet settings to the original factory-programmed settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up your Internet settings before restoring. See “Backing up the Clavinova’s internal data [FullBackup] on page 103 for details. Information contained in the cookies will be restored at the same time. Internet Normal (Default) Settings List DHCP ON (available) Wireless LAN OFF (no settings) Proxy server OFF (no settings) CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 63 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Message List (IDC) The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message CannotOperate Meaning Exit--> Execution of the operation failed because the recorded data has not been saved. Save the data by following the instructions “Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device ... [Save]” on page 42. Basic Operation CheckingLANadaptor Currently checking whether the USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the musical instrument is compatible or not. This might take about 5 minutes. Please wait for a while. Communication Error (xxxx) An error in communication with the Internet occurred. Confirm whether the connection is correct by “Connecting the Instrument to the Internet” on page 51. Exit--> * For detailed information on the error, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66. Communication Timeout (xxxx) Exit--> A communication timeout occurred. If this message appears repeatedly, the communication may be unreliable. Make sure that your communication environment is appropriate. ConnectError (xxxx) Exit--> The connection test of the instrument to the Internet has failed. Confirm whether the connection is correct by “Connecting the Instrument to the Internet” on page 51. * For detailed information on the error, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66. Connecting UnknownLANadaptor Currently connecting to the Internet by a USB wireless LAN adaptor whose compatibility has not been confirmed. ConnectionError Exit--> (xxxx) The instrument could not be successfully connected to the Internet. Confirm whether the connection is correct by referring to “Connecting the Instrument to the Internet” on page 51. * For detailed information on the error, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66. ConnectSucceeded 64 OK--> The connection test of the instrument to the Internet has succeeded. ErrorOccurred (xxxx) Exit--> An error occurred. Check the error code number in the display and refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66 for an explanation. Invalid LANadaptor Exit--> The particular USB wireless LAN adaptor which is connected to the instrument is invalid. Use a USB wireless LAN adaptor whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). InvalidWEPkey This message is displayed when the WEP key input is incorrect. Re-input the correct WEP key. NoWirelessAdaptor The USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument. • Confirm whether the connection of the USB wireless LAN adaptor to the instrument is correct. • Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal (page 123). UnknownLANadaptor OK--> The particular USB wireless LAN adaptor which is connected to the instrument is unsupported. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Message WirelessNetwork NotFound Meaning This message appears if the wireless network has not been found. • Please check that the power of the access point is turned on and that the settings of the device are correct. • Set the instrument within reach of the signal from the access point. The signal will not be received if the distance from the access point is too great or there is an obstacle blocking reception. Basic Operation The characters “(xxxx)” indicate the relevant error code. For detailed information on specific error codes, refer to the “Error Code List (IDC)” on page 66. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 65 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Error Code List (IDC) Error Code Basic Operation 66 Meaning 1110 USB wireless LAN adaptor, LAN cable, or router cannot be recognized. Please check whether a USB wireless LAN adaptor, LAN cable, or router has been correctly connected. Also check that you are not using a damaged cable. 1120 The USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the musical instrument does not function properly. Make sure to use a USB wireless LAN adaptor whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 53). 1130 Communication with the access point has failed. • Please check that all settings of the wireless LAN are correct. • Please check that the power of the access point is turned on and that the settings of the device are correct. • Set the instrument within reach of the signal from the access point. The signal will not be received if the distance from the access point is too great or there is an obstacle blocking reception. 1250 – 1252 IP address could not be obtained from the router. • (When using a cable LAN connection:) Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected and that the cable you are using is not damaged. • (When using a wireless LAN connection:) Check that all settings for the wireless LAN are correct. • Make sure that the power of the router is turned on. Also, confirm that the router settings allows the use of DHCP. • Try turning on the power of the router once again. 1410 – 1415 Connection to the special website has failed. • Make sure that the power of the router is turned on. Also, confirm that the router settings are correct. • (When using a fixed IP address, proxy server:) Check that all LAN settings are correct. • Try turning on the power of the router once again. 2001 Communication error. Check the communication environment. Try connecting again after a while. 2042 Communication timeout occurred. • Check that the LAN cable is correctly connected and that the cable you are using is not damaged. • Make sure that the power of the router is turned on. Also, confirm that the router settings are correct. • Try turning on the router again. 2404 Server was not found. Try again after a while. 3001 File access error. 3002 File cannot be read. 3003 Data cannot be written to the file. 3004 There is not enough available memory in the media. 3011 There is not enough space in the assigned folder. 3019 This media has not been formatted. Format the media after making sure that there is no important data remaining. Please be careful that all data will be deleted when executing the format. 3020 Write-protect has been enabled for the media. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Access point A device that acts as a communication hub for multiple wireless devices, and conventionally enables both wired and wireless LAN connections. Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for highspeed, high-volume data communication. Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to reenter the information each time you visit the site. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device—much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument. Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Link Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link. Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation Glossary of Terms (IDC) 67 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Basic Operation 68 Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. WEP Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, a security protocol for wireless networks. WEP protects communication contents from being intercepted. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection. Wireless Game Adaptor (Wireless Ethernet Converter or Bridge) Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game machines, etc. equipped with [LAN] ports. Wireless network Wireless network where signal is sent and received by using electric waves. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Problem Cause Solution The LAN cable is not connected securely to the [LAN] port. Check the connection of the LAN cable to the [LAN] port. The LAN cable used for connection may be damaged. Use a new LAN cable. The instrument cannot connect to the Internet using a wireless game adaptor. The settings of the wireless game adaptor are incorrect. The settings of the wireless game adaptor cannot be made on the instrument. For information about how to make settings, read the owner’s manual for the particular wireless game adaptor you are using. The USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument. The particular USB wireless LAN adaptor you are using is not compatible with the instrument. Check the list of USB wireless LAN adaptors whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). The desired USB [TO DEVICE] terminal has not been selected. This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and one on the terminal at the front. Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal (page 123). The instrument cannot connect to the Internet using a static IP address, proxy server. The necessary Internet settings have not been made. Make Internet settings on the instrument as explained in the section “About the Internet Settings” on page 58. The instrument cannot connect to the Internet using a wireless LAN. The access point is set to conceal the SSID. Temporarily remove the setting that conceals SSID, and make the appropriate Internet settings. The access point is set to filter the MAC address. (When using a USB Wireless LAN Adaptor:) Register the MAC address of USB wireless LAN adaptor you are using in the access point. (When using a Wireless Game Adaptor:) For information about the MAC address that is registered, refer to the owner’s manual for the wireless game adaptor you are using. The access point is set for encryption in a format other than WEP. This instrument is encrypted in WEP format only. No signal from the access point to the instrument is received. Set the instrument within reach of the signal from the access point. The signal will not be received if the distance from the access point is too great or there is an obstacle blocking reception. The WEP key has been entered incorrectly (e.g., incorrect use of uppercase and lowercase letters). After confirming the characters of the WEP key, including uppercase and lowercase letters, enter it again. The instrument cannot connect to the Internet using the [LAN] port. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation Troubleshooting (IDC) 69 Listening to the Songs on Internet Yamaha provides a special website with a data service that enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres on your instrument. For the latest services, refer to the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Before connect the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read “Internet Direct Connection (IDC)” on page 51. 1-2 1-1 Basic Operation 4 3 2 5 Procedure 1. Display the Song Select screen. 1-1 Make sure that the instrument is connected to the Internet, then press the [SONG SELECT] button. 1-2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select “INTERNET.” The folder name in the Internet is displayed on the screen. A B INTERNET Connecting NO C YES D The number of measures A B INTERNET BAR--I-DIR:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx / C NO YES D Folder name Internet: The Internet can be used by the instrument to play back a wide range of songs (song data) in various musical genres. 70 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual TIP Change the Clavinova’s character type (“CharacterCode”) as appropriate for the selected song (page 47). Listening to the Songs on Internet Select a song. TIP 2-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a folder. Press the D [+] button to open the folder and press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. 2-2 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a desired Internet song. A B INTERNET BAR001 I-001:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx / C Start playback. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. 4. Stop playback. Press the [STOP] button. YES D Song name 3. NO The Sync Start (page 21), Part settings on/off (page 21), and A-B repeat (page 22) become effective only after you play back the song once. TIP If the song name extends beyond what can be displayed in the screen, you can press the D [+] button to move toward the right in steps of one character. Press the D [–] button to move back to the left in steps of one character. Basic Operation 2. TIP You can play the keyboard along with the Internet song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. TIP You might not be able to adjust the tempo of songs from the Internet. In such cases, the default tempo “---” is automatically selected. TIP 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. Song data from the Internet is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 71 Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. On the left of the panel At front Basic Operation SELECT USB TO DEVICE 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal (A/B) This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Connecting to a USB storage device” on page 74. 2 USB [TO HOST] terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 75 for more information. 3 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] terminals Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. 4 [AUX PEDAL] jack A separately sold FC7 foot controller or FC4/FC5 foot switch can be connected to this jack. By using an FC7 you can control the volume while playing to add expression to your performance, or control various other functions. By using an FC4/FC5, you can switch various selected functions on/off. To select the function that will be controlled, use the [FUNCTION] parameter [AuxPedalFunc] (page 97). The [PLAY/PAUSE] function can also be assigned to a foot switch (page 98). 72 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 6 7 TIP There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO HOST]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. TIP Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart is available for downloading from the Yamaha Manual Library. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ CAUTION Connect or disconnect the pedal when the power is off. Connections 5 AUX IN [L/L+R], [R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] (page 25) settings do not. TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack. TIP AUX IN Basic Operation Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. Phone plug (standard) Audio cable Plug shape depends on the device. AUX OUT Tone Generator 6 AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks These jacks let you connect the Clavinova to external powered speaker systems, for playing in larger venues at higher volumes. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. AUX OUT AUX IN Phone plug (standard) Phone plug (standard) When the sound from the AUX OUT jacks is routed to the AUX IN jacks, the input sound will be output from the speaker of the CLP. The output sound may be excessively loud and may cause noise. TIP Powered speaker Clavinova TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. Cable The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting will affect the sound that is output from AUX OUT jacks. When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external speaker and you want to turn off the speaker sound of the Clavinova, switch the speaker off (page 99). Moreover, the tone quality of the instrument sound output from the speakers and the headphones changes automatically to the appropriate settings according to how the instrument is being used (see chart below). No plugs to connected to AUX OUT jacks Speakers sound Speakers do not sound Plugs connected to AUX OUT jacks Speakers On Speakers Normal (Headphones Switch) Speakers Off Speakers On Speakers Normal (Headphones Switch) Speakers Off Headphones connected Optimum equalization for speakers applied Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Headphones not connected Optimum equalization for speakers applied Optimum equalization for speakers applied Flat Flat Flat Flat CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 73 Connections 7 [LAN] port This port allows direct connection of the CLP-380 to the Internet, letting you use a special service on the Yamaha website for playing back songs in a variety of musical genres as background music on the instrument. Before connecting the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read the section “Internet Direct Connection (IDC)” on page 51. Connecting to a USB storage device Basic Operation To connect to a USB storage device, be sure to read the section “Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal” on page 122. To display the data in the USB storage device To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG SELECT] button and select a USB storage device with the A [–][+] buttons to engage the Song Selection mode, or press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to engage the File/ Song Setting mode. If you try to engage these modes before connecting the USB storage device, press the [EXIT] button to exit the mode and re-engage the mode. Backing up your data to a computer ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saves internal data to a USB storage device. Instrument USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer. Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders. Computer 74 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual USB storage device Connections ■ Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Basic Operation Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files created on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device. Computer USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument. Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal Instrument USB storage device Connecting a personal computer By connecting a computer to the USB [TO HOST] or MIDI terminals, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music software. Keep in mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver. There are the two methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal (see below) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals (page 76) If you are using a computer that has a USB interface, we recommend that you connect the computer and the instrument by USB, rather than by MIDI. TERMINOLOGY Driver: A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device. You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument. For more information, refer to the following pages. CAUTION When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power of the Clavinova and quit any application software that is open on the computer before connecting any cables. After making connections, turn on the power to the Clavinova. CAUTION If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left connected. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 75 Connections Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal on the Clavinova. TIP • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. Instrument USB [TO HOST] terminal Basic Operation USB cable Computer Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI terminals Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. MIDI cable USB port or serial port (modem or printer terminal) MIDI [IN] terminal MIDI [OUT] terminal Instrument Computer MIDI interface 76 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as recording and playback, metronome, Voices, iAFC, etc. For basic procedure on making these settings, refer to page 80. Parameter List Recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] Settings Parameter name Reference page Saving recorded songs to a USB storage device Save 42 Deleting a song from the Clavinova’s Storage memory or from a USB storage device Delete 43 Renaming files Rename 43 Copying files Copy 44 Moving files Move 45 Making folders in the USB storage device MakeDir 45 Formatting a USB storage device Format 46 Automatically selecting a song in storage media SongAutoOpen 46 Changing the type of characters on screen CharacterCode 47 Playing back a song/all songs repeatedly SongRepeat 82 Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number PhraseMark 82 Correcting note timing Quantize 83 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing QuickPlay 83 Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 84 Deleting data from each channel ChannelClear 84 Selecting a record starting method RecStart 33 Selecting a record ending method RecEnd 33 Recording parts 3 – 16 (Extra Parts) RecExtraPartsCh 35 Detailed Settings Detailed Settings Metronome [METRONOME SETTING] Settings Parameter name Reference page Setting the metronome time signature TimeSignature 85 Setting the metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 85 Setting the metronome voice MetronomeSound 85 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 77 Detailed Settings Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “ * ” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Detailed Settings Settings Parameter name Reference page Setting the octave* Octave 87 Setting the volume level* Volume 87 Setting the position of right and left channels* Pan 87 Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) Detune 87 Selecting the reverb type ReverbType 88 Setting the reverb depth* ReverbSend 88 Selecting the chorus type ChorusType 88 Setting the chorus depth* ChorusSend 88 Setting the chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 89 Selecting the DSP type* DSP Type (DSP) 89 Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* VibeRotorSpeed 89 Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff) 89 Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed) 90 Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* DSPDepth 90 Adjusting the brightness of the sound* Brightness 90 Adjusting the resonance effect* HarmonicContent (Harmonic) 90 Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq) 90 Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* EQ LowGain 91 Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq) 91 Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* EQ HighGain 91 Setting the touch sensitivity* TouchSense 91 iAFC [iAFC SETTING] 78 Settings Parameter name Turning iAFC on/off iAFC 92 Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect depth DynDmpFX Depth 92 Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth SpatialFX Depth 93 Calibration (automatic adjustment) Calibration 93 Restoring the default calibration setting iAFC Default 93 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Reference page Detailed Settings Other settings [FUNCTION] Parameter name Reference page Changing the key Transpose 94 Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 94 Fine tuning the pitch Tune 95 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 95 Selecting a scale Scale 95 Specifying the Split Point SplitPoint 96 Setting the right pedal function RPedalFunc 96 Setting the center pedal function CPedalFunc 96 Setting the left pedal function LPedalFunc 96 Setting the auxiliary pedal function AuxPedalFunc 97 Turning the right pedal function on/off RPedalOnOff 97 Turning the center pedal function on/off CPedalOnOff 97 Turning the left pedal function on/off LPedalOnOff 97 Turning the auxiliary pedal function on/off AuxPedalOnOff 98 Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal PedalPlay/Pause 98 Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 98 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound HalfPedalPoint 98 Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal SoftPedalDepth 98 Setting the depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 99 Setting the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 99 Specifying the volume of the key-off sound KeyOffSamplingDepth 99 Setting the range of pitch bend PitchBendRange 99 Switching the speaker on/off Speaker 99 Setting the MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 100 Setting the MIDI receive channel MidiInChannel 100 Turning local control on/off LocalControl 100 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission MidiOutSelect 101 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 101 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 101 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel InitialSetup 101 Selecting items saved at shutdown MemoryBackup 102 Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 102 Backing up the Clavinova’s internal data FullBackup 103 Displaying the version number Version 103 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Detailed Settings Settings 79 Detailed Settings Making detailed settings 12 1 2 3 3 4 3 5 Procedure 1. Access a setting menu. Detailed Settings Press the desired setting button ([FILE/SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [iAFC SETTING], or [FUNCTION]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. Select the desired parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–][+], and/or C [–][+] buttons repeatedly as required. 3. Set the parameter or part. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)], C [–][+], and D [–][+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display confirmation (“Sure?→”). To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button. When “Overwrite?→” appears after the “Completed” message, press the B [+ (YES)] button. A B Quantize Execute?--> Strength=100% 1/4 C 80 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual NO YES D 1 1 1 Detailed Settings If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. A B Main Octave C NO YES D Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. Detailed Settings 5. Set?--> 0 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 81 Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] For information on the settings “Save” – “CharacterCode,” see “Handling files such as deleting song files ... [FILE/SONG SETTING]” on page 39. You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PRESET”), memory songs (“MEMORY”), or External songs (“USB1”) (see page 48). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to access the “File/Song Setting” menu. Detailed Settings [FILE/SONG SETTING] button Playing back a song/all songs repeatedly Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [SongRepeat] [PhraseMark] You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the USB storage devices. When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [STOP] button. See the procedure on page 80. If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers in the score to play back from the score from the mark point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly. If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified phrase until you press the [STOP] button. If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts without repeat. See the procedure on page 80. Select on or off. B A SongRepeat Off USBSongs NO YES Select repeat on or off. D C Specify the repeated songs. A PhraseMark 001 Setting range: [USBSongs] ...........All songs in the media inserted in the USB storage device [MemorySongs] .....All songs in the Clavinova’s memory [USB+Memory] ......All songs from “USBSongs” and “MemorySongs” [PresetSongs] ........All 50 preset songs [ALL] ......................All songs from “USBSongs,” “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” [OneSong] .............One song selected from the front panel B RepeatOff C NO YES D Specify the phrase number. Setting range of the phrase number: --- (not specified) 0 – the last phrase number of the song TIP TIP When several USB storage devices are connected, the device which contains the previously selected song is the destination device. 82 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual If you select any song other than those from the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.” Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] Quarter-note length Correcting note timing Original data [Quantize] You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes. Changes are made by song. See the procedure on page 80. Stores the changed value. Quantizing strength=100 Quantizing strength=50 Setting range: 0% – 100% B A Quantize Execute?--> Strength=100% 1/16 NO YES D C Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing Specifies the type of note. [QuickPlay] 1/4................. quarter note 1/6................. quarter note triplet 1/8................. eighth note 1/12............... eighth note triplet 1/16............... sixteenth note This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 80. A Detailed Settings Notes for which you can adjust the timing: B QuickPlay NO YES On 1/24............... sixteenth note triplet 1/32............... thirty-second note 1/8+1/12........... eighth note + eighth note triplet* 1/16+1/12......... sixteenth note + eighth note triplet* 1/16+1/24......... sixteenth note + sixteenth triplet* C D Setting range: [On] ....................... Playing from the first note [Off] ....................... Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same part, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the part are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. From this display, you can determine how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 83 Detailed settings for recording and playback [FILE/SONG SETTING] Auditioning the channels Deleting data from each channel [ChannelListen] [ChannelClear] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 80. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 80. Delete data. B A ChannelClear Execute?--> Ch1 B A ChannelListen Start?--> Ch1 NO YES Select the desired channel for playback. YES D C Select the desired channel for deletion. D C NO Setting range: Ch1 – Ch16, ALL (all channels) Setting range: TIP Ch1 – Ch16 Detailed Settings TIP The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned to a part, so in this instrument, channel means the same as part. The song data consists of 16 channels. A channel is assigned to a part, so in this instrument, channel means the same as part. TIP Even channels that contain no data are displayed. TIP Even channels that contain no data are displayed. TIP When you clear all channels using the “ALL” parameter, you can overwrite the song. In this case, the file which contains song settings with no channel data is saved. For information on the settings “RecStart” and “RecEnd,” see “Re-recording a song partially” on page 33. For information on the setting “RecExtraPartsCh,” see “Recording a performance of several different parts” on page 35. 84 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the METRONOME [SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. Setting the metronome time signature Selecting the metronome voice [TimeSignature] [MetronomeSound] See the procedure on page 80. See the procedure on page 80. A B TimeSignature 4/ 4 NO A B MetronomeSound YES NO YES BellOff C D Set the numerator of the time signature. Detailed Settings METRONOME [SETTING] button C Set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–][+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–][+] buttons to select “4.” Setting range for the numerator: 1 – 16 D Setting range: [BellOff] ................. Click (standard metronome sound) [EnglishVoice]........ Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English [GermanVoice] ...... Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German [JapaneseVoice].... Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese [FrenchVoice] ........ Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French [SpanishVoice] ...... Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish [BellOn] ................. Click and bell Setting options for the denominator: TIP 2, 4, and 8 To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 80. A B MetronomeVolume NO YES 100 C D Setting range: 0 – 127 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 85 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice. Select a voice referring to the section “Selecting and Playing Voices” on page 23. 2. Access the “Voice Setting” menu. Press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. 3 Detailed Settings 3. 2 [VOICE SETTING] button Press the A [–][+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] ...................... MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) [Main × Layer]......... MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) [Left]......................... LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) [Left × Layer] ........... LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) 86 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Parameter names enclosed in parentheses ( ) are displayed in Dual mode. Setting the octave Setting the position of right and left channels [Octave]* The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or downward in steps of an octave. See the procedure on page 80. [Pan]* You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 80. B A Main Octave Set?--> 0 A NO Main Pan D C B YES Set?--> C NO C YES D Detailed Settings In Dual mode: In Dual mode: B A MainxLayer Set?--> Octave(GrndPno1) 0 NO YES A MainxLayer Pan(GrndPno1) D C B Set?--> C NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: -2 (two octaves lower) – 0 (no pitch shift) – +2 (two octaves higher) Setting range: L64 (hard left) – C (center) – R63 (hard right) Setting the volume level Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Volume]* [Detune] You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 80. A B Main Volume Set?--> 100 NO C YES The pitch of the two sounds selected in Dual mode can be “skewed” slightly away from each other. See the procedure on page 80. A D B MainxLayer Detune In Dual mode: C A Set?--> + 3 NO YES D B MainxLayer Set?--> Volume(GrndPno1) 100 C NO YES D Setting range: -20 – +20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch of the first sound and lower the pitch of the second sound. Negative (–) settings will do the opposite.) Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 – 127 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 87 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the reverb type Selecting the chorus type [ReverbType] [Chorus Type] TIP TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” See the procedure on page 80. See the procedure on page 80. B A Main ReverbType Set?--> Hall1 NO A Main ChorusType YES D C B Set?--> Chorus NO C YES D Detailed Settings Setting range: Setting range: Room......................Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall1.......................Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2.......................Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage......................Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate .......................Reverberation simulating that created by vibration of a metal plate. Chorus ................... Adds a rich, spacious sound. Celeste .................. Adds swell and a spacious sound. Flanger .................. Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* Setting the reverb depth See the procedure on page 80. [ReverbSend]* A B Main ChorusSend TIP NO C The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” See the procedure on page 80. Set?--> 48 D In Dual mode: A B A Main ReverbSend Set?--> 14 NO C YES B MainxLayer Set?--> ChorusSend(E.Piano1) 72 NO YES D C In Dual mode: D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) A Setting range: B MainxLayer Set?--> ReverbSend(E.Piano1) 26 C NO YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 – 127 88 YES CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 0 – 127 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the chorus on/off Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* [ChorusOnOff] You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. See the procedure on page 80. [VibeRotorSpeed] TERMINOLOGY Rotor= The rotating portion of an electrical device etc. This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. This sets the speed of the vibrato effect that is applied when you have selected Vibraphone and are using the VibeRotor pedal. See the procedure on page 80. B A B A Main ChorusOnOff Set?--> Off NO YES Main VibeRotorSpeed Set?--> 6 NO YES Detailed Settings D C D C Setting range: Setting range: On/Off 1 – 10 Selecting the DSP type* Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* [DSP Type (DSP)] You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 80. A B Main DSP Type C Set?--> DelayLCR NO YES D [VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)] This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. It turns on/off the vibrato effect that is applied when you use the VibeRotor pedal. See the procedure on page 80. Setting range: DelayLCR...............Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. DelayLR .................Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo.......................Echo-like delay CrossDelay ............Left and right delays are crossed. Symphonic .............Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. Rotary.....................Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. Tremolo ..................The volume level changes in rapid cycles. VibeRotor ...............The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. AutoPan .................The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser....................The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah.................The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. SoundBoard ...........Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. Off ..........................No effect. A B Main VibeRotorOnOff C Set?--> On NO YES D Setting range: On/Off CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 89 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* Adjusting the resonance effect* [HarmonicContent (Harmonic)] [RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)] See the procedure on page 80. This will be displayed only if Rotary is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. It sets the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect. See the procedure on page 80. A B A Main Set?--> HarmonicContent 0 NO YES D C B Setting range: Main RotarySpeed Set?--> Slow NO C YES -64 – +63 D TIP Resonance can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, making the sound brighter and harder. Setting range: Slow/Fast Detailed Settings Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* [DSPDepth] [EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)] This sets the depth of the DSP effect (page 89). Some DSP Type settings do not allow you to set the DSPDepth. See the procedure on page 80. A TERMINOLOGY Equalizer: An audio equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into multiple regions and enables the user to adjust the relative amplitude of each region. B Main DSPDepth Set?--> 127 NO YES Low Gain C High Gain D Setting range: 1 (output only the original sound with almost no effect applied) – 127 (output only the sound processed by the effect) Adjusting the brightness of the sound* Low Freq. [Brightness] See the procedure on page 80. See the procedure on page 80. A A C Set?--> 0 NO YES D C Setting range: 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz Setting range: -64 – +63 90 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual B Main EQ LowFreq. B Main Brightness High Freq. Set?--> 32 NO YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* [EQ LowGain] See the procedure on page 80. B A Main EQ LowGain Set?--> 0 NO YES D C Setting range: This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 80. -12 – +12 dB A B Main TouchSense C See the procedure on page 80. D A A B MainxLayer Set?--> TouchSense(GrndPno1) 64 B Set?--> 500 YES In Dual mode: [EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)] Main EQ HighFreq. NO Detailed Settings Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* Set?--> 64 C NO C NO YES D YES Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) D Setting range: Setting range: 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz 0 (softest) – 64 (largest changes in the level) – 127 (loudest and fixed) Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* [EQ HighGain] See the procedure on page 80. A B Main EQ HighGain C Set?--> 0 NO YES D Setting range: -12 – +12 dB CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 91 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant, similar to an acoustic musical instruments. This lets you experience the ambience and reverberation that are characteristic of performing on stage or simulates the sustain sound that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano. This section describes how to make various settings for the iAFC function. You can also perform an automatic adjustment in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect. Procedure Press [iAFC SETTING] button to enter iAFC Setting mode. [iAFC SETTING] button Detailed Settings Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you move the Clavinova (page 93). When the [iAFC SETTING] button is pressed before performing the automatic adjustment, the “Calibration” screen will be displayed. TIP iAFC cannot be used in the following cases. When the Speaker setting is Normal, and headphones are connected. When the Speaker setting is off. TIP When using iAFC, do not block the speaker located on the rear panel of the Clavinova. The optimal iAFC effect cannot be obtained if this speaker is blocked. TIP iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Electronic Microphone Rotator) technology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback. Turning iAFC on/off Adjusting the Dynamic Damper Effect depth [iAFC] [DynDmpFX Depth] See the procedure on page 80. B A iAFC NO YES On C Setting range: On/Off D Dynamic Damper Effect is one type of the iAFC effect. Dynamic Damper Effect simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano. The internal microphones are not used, but the sound produced within the Clavinova is processed to create a spacious sensation, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. See the procedure on page 80. B A DynDmpFX Depth NO YES 105 C Setting range: 0 – 127 92 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual D Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] Adjusting the Spatial Effect depth [SpatialFX Depth] Restoring the default calibration setting [iAFC Default] A This sets the calibration function to the default setting. See the procedure on page 80. A B iAFC Default C Set?--> NO YES D Detailed Settings Spatial Effect is one type of the iAFC effect. Spatial Effect creates a sense of reverberation and spaciousness by picking up the output sound using internal microphones and output the sound from the speaker on the rear of the instrument. The spread and spaciousness of the sound is different depending on the depth. For lower depth settings, this creates the resonance and enhances the acoustic realism of the sound that is characteristic of acoustic instruments by creating a virtual soundboard. For deeper depth settings, the sound of the instrument itself and the sound of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by internal microphones, and processed to simulate the spatial characteristics of performing together on stage. See the procedure on page 80. B SpatialFX Depth NO YES 14 C D Setting range: 0 – 127 Calibration (automatic adjustment) [Calibration] This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect will be obtained. When automatic adjust begins, a test sound (noise) will sound for about five seconds. While automatic adjustment is being performed, do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 80. A B Calibration Sure?--> Test sound is output. C NO YES D TIP The keyboard will not produce sound while automatic adjustment is being performed. Nor is it possible to adjust the volume of the Clavinova. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 93 Other settings [FUNCTION] You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [FUNCTION] button to enter Function mode. [FUNCTION] button Changing the key Selecting a touch response [Transpose] [TouchResponse] Detailed Settings TIP TRANSPOSE= To change the key (Changing the key: To raise or lower the overall pitch of the entire song.) The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. B A Transpose Master NO YES 0 C D Setting for: Master ....................The sound of the entire instrument (the manually-played sound and the song playback) Keyboard ...............The manually-played sound Song.......................The song playback Setting range: -12 (-1 octave) – 0 (normal pitch) – +12 (+1 octave) 94 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 80. A B TouchResponse Vel= 64 Fixed C NO YES D Setting range: Light....................... With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium.................. Standard touch response. Heavy .................... You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed...................... No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to set the volume level. Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: 1 – 127 Other settings [FUNCTION] Fine tuning the pitch Selecting a scale [Tune] [Scale] You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 80. A B Tune NO YES A3=440.0Hz C You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 80. D A B Scale Setting range: A3 = 414.8 Hz – 466.8 Hz (0.2 Hz steps) BaseNote=C PureMajor NO C YES D Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 80. A B PianoTuningCurve NO YES Stretch C D Setting range: Stretch....................Tuning curve particularly for pianos Flat .........................Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range Detailed Settings Setting range: Equal ..................... One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor ............................... Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. Pythagorean .......... This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is based on the interval of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone .............. This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. Werckmeister/Kirnberger ............................... These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Normal setting: Equal If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons. A B Scale BaseNote=C PureMajor C NO YES D Setting range: C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 95 Other settings [FUNCTION] Specifying the Split Point Setting the center pedal function [Split Point] [CPedalFunc] You can specify the split point (the boundary between the right-hand and left-hand keyboard areas). See the procedure on page 80. See the procedure on page 80. A B CPedalFunc A Set?--> Sostenuto NO YES B C SplitPoint NO D YES F#2 C Setting range: D Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except for the following parameters. • SustainCont • Expression • PitchBend Up • PitchBend Down Setting range: A -1 – C7 TIP You can also use [SPLIT] to set the split point (page 29). Detailed Settings Normal Setting: Sostenuto Setting the right pedal function [RPedalFunc] Setting the left pedal function [LPedalFunc] See the procedure on page 80. A See the procedure on page 80. B RPedalFunc C Set?--> SustainCont NO YES Sustain ...................ON/OFF switch type damper SustainCont............Damper that sustains the sound proportionately to how deeply you press the pedal Sostenuto ...............Sostenuto (page 24) Soft.........................Soft (page 24) Expression .............A function that lets you create changes in dynamics (volume) as you play PitchBend Up.........A function that smoothly raises the pitch PitchBend Down......A function that smoothly lowers the pitch RotarySpeed ..........Change the rotational speed of the JazzOrgan rotary speaker (switch between fast/slow each time you press the pedal) VibeRotor ...............Switch the vibraphone vibrato on/off (switch on/off each time you press the pedal) SustainCont 96 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual LPedalFunc D Setting range: Normal setting: B A C Set?--> Soft NO YES D Setting range: Same as “Setting the right pedal function” above, except for the following parameters. • SustainCont • Expression • PitchBend Up • PitchBend Down Normal Setting: Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan, MellowOrgan and VibraPhone), Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan and MellowOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) Other settings [FUNCTION] Setting the auxiliary pedal function Turning the center pedal function on/off [AuxPedalFunc] [CPedalOnOff] You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 80. A B AuxPedalFunc Set?--> Expression NO C YES This turns the center pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the center pedal function (set on page 96) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 80. D B A CPedalOnOff Main Setting range: Same as “Right pedal function assignment” (page 96). Set?--> On NO YES D C Normal setting: TIP Yamaha FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, or PitchBend Up/Down. Detailed Settings Select on or off. Select the voice part for which the center pedal on/off setting is to be changed. Expression Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) Setting range: Yamaha FC4 foot switch Yamaha FC5 foot switch On/Off These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, or VibeRotor. Turning the right pedal function on/off Normal Setting: Different for each voice. Turning the left pedal function on/off [RPedalOnOff] [LPedalOnOff] This turns the right pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the right pedal function (set on page 96) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 80. This turns the left pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the left pedal function (set on page 96) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 80. B A RPedalOnOff Main Set?--> On NO Select the voice part for which the right pedal on/off setting is to be changed. LPedalOnOff Main D C B A YES Set?--> On NO YES D C Select on or off. Select the voice part for which the left pedal on/off setting is to be changed. Select on or off. Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) Setting for: Setting range: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) On/Off Setting range: Normal Setting: On/Off Different for each voice. Normal Setting: Different for each voice. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 97 Other settings [FUNCTION] Turning the auxiliary pedal function on/off Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] [AuxPedalOnOff] This turns the auxiliary pedal function on or off for the relevant voice part. In other words, you can select the desired voice part (Main, MainLayer, Left, LeftLayer) and determine whether the auxiliary pedal function (set on page 97) will affect that part or not. See the procedure on page 80. A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] jack may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 80. A B AuxPedalType A AuxPedalOnOff Main NO C Set?--> On NO C YES Make B D YES Setting range: D Make, Break Select on or off. Detailed Settings Select the voice part for which the AUX pedal on/off setting is to be changed. Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound Setting for: Main, MLayer (MainLayer), Left, LLayer (LeftLayer) [HalfPedalPoint] Setting range: Here you can specify the point to which you must depress the pedal (right and AUX) before the assigned effect begins to be applied. This setting applies only to the “SustainCont” effect (page 96) that is assigned to the right or AUX pedal. On/Off Normal Setting: Different for each voice. Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal B A HalfPedalPoint NO YES 0 [PedalPlay/Pause] D C TIP If you assign the SONG PLAY/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Function menu (pages 96 and 97) is disabled. Setting range: -2 (effective with the shallowest press) – 0 – +2 (effective with the deepest press) See the procedure on page 80. Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal B A PedalPlay/Pause Center C Select a pedal to assign the function NO [SoftPedalDepth] YES Off D See the procedure on page 80. Select on or off. B A SoftPedalDepth NO YES 5 Setting for: C Left, Center, AUX Setting range: Setting range: On/Off 1 – 10 Normal setting: Off for all pedals 98 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual D Other settings [FUNCTION] Setting the depth of string resonance Setting the range of pitch bend [StringResonanceDepth] [PitchBendRange] This parameter is effective on the voices, such as “Grand Piano 1.” See the procedure on page 80. A B StringResonanceDepth NO YES 5 C D This specifies the amount of change that can be produced by the pitch bend function which smoothly varies the pitch. This setting applies only to the manually-played sound. This setting can be made in semitone steps. You can set the pedal function (page 96) to specify whether the pitch will be raised or lowered. See the procedure on page 80. Setting range: A B Off, 1 – 10 PitchBendRange NO YES 2 Setting range: 0 – +12 (Pressing the pedal will raise/lower the pitch by 12 semitones [1 octave]) [SustainSamplingDepth] Normal setting: This parameter is effective only on the voice group “GRANDPIANO1.” See the procedure on page 80. A 2 Switching the speaker on/off B SustainSamplingDepth D Detailed Settings C Setting the depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal NO YES [Speaker] 5 C D This setting lets you switch the speaker on/off. See the procedure on page 80. Setting range: Off, 1 – 10 A B Speaker Normal(HeadphoneSW) Specifying the volume of the key-off sound C NO YES D Setting range: [KeyOffSamplingDepth] You can adjust the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key) This is effective on the voice groups “Grand Piano1,” “Harpsichord,” and “E.Clavichord” and on the voice “E.Piano2.” See the procedure on page 80. Normal (HeadphoneSW) .... The speaker will sound only if headphones are not connected. On....................................... The speaker will always sound. Off ....................................... The speaker will not sound. B A KeyOffSamplingDepth NO YES 5 C D Setting range: Off, 1 – 10 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 99 Other settings [FUNCTION] USB TO HOST MIDI IN Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 80. A Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16 Usb2 Ch1 – Ch16 Song Keyboard – LeftLayer B MidiOutChannel Main Midi/Usb1Ch1 NO C YES D Select a voice part. Specify the channel. Turning Local control on/off Setting for: Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer [LocalControl] Setting range: Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) Detailed Settings Normal setting: Main ......................Midi/Usb1 Ch1 Left ........................Midi/Usb1 Ch2 Layer .....................Midi/Usb1 Ch3 Left Layer ..............Midi/Usb1 Ch4 Setting the MIDI receive channel [MidiInChannel] You can specify whether each channel of data from MIDI [IN] and USB [TO HOST] will be received. See the procedure on page 80. “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 80. A B LocalControl A MidiInChannel Midi/Usb1Ch1 NO Select a channel C YES Song C D Select a MIDI receive part Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: Setting for: Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16 Usb2 Ch1 – 16 Setting range: Song, Main, Left, Layer, LeftLayer, Keyboard, Off Normal setting: Midi/Usb1 Ch1 – Ch16........Song Usb2 Ch1............................Keyboard Usb2 Ch2............................Main Usb2 Ch3............................Left Usb2 Ch4............................Layer Usb2 Ch5............................LeftLayer Others .................................Off 100 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual NO YES On B On D Other settings [FUNCTION] Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] [MidiOutSelect] You can select whether your performance data or song playback data is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 80. This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 80. B A A TransmitParameter Note B MidiOutSelect NO NO YES Keyboard D C C YES On D Select a type of data. Keyboard ...............performance data played on the keyboard Song.......................song playback data Normal setting: Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Detailed Settings Setting range: Select on or off. Setting range: Keyboard On/Off Normal setting: Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 80. B A ReceiveParameter Note C Select a type of data. NO YES On D Select on or off. On for all types of data Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 80. A B Type of data: InitialSetup Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: C Start?--> NO YES D On/Off Normal setting: On for all types of data CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 101 Other settings [FUNCTION] Selecting items saved at shutdown Restoring the normal (default) settings [MemoryBackup] [FactorySet] You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 47) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 80. A B MemoryBackup Transpose NO You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. The CharacterCode parameter setting (page 47) does not change. The MemoryBackup parameter setting (On/Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 80. YES Off CAUTION C Detailed Settings Select the desired item. D Select on or off. Do not turn off the power during factory set. Doing so could result in damage to the data. Reset the Clavinova. Setting for: Transpose Brilliance ReverbOnOff iAfc SplitPoint Main/LeftVoice MetronomeSetting File/SongSetting MidiSetting (“MidiOutChannel” – “TransmitParameter” in the Function settings) Function (except for Transpose, SplitPoint and Midi settings). Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, and Function (except for Transpose and SplitPoint setting) parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. A B FactorySet Execute?--> MemorySongExcluded NO C YES D Select whether the memory songs are erased or kept. Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded ....... Memory songs are kept. MemorySongIncluded ........ Memory songs are erased. Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. C7 [POWER] switch 102 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Other settings [FUNCTION] Backing up the Clavinova's internal data [FullBackup] For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you copy or save your important data to a USB storage device. This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged. Perform the operation after connecting the USB storage device. See the procedure on page 80. Perform backup. A Displaying the version number [Version] You can display the version number of the program of this instrument, [LAN] port driver, and USB-LAN adaptor driver. See the procedure on page 80. Setting for: •Program (the program of this instrument) •LAN port ([LAN] port driver) •USB-LAN adaptor (USB-LAN adaptor driver) B FullBackup Save Execute?--> C NO YES D Detailed Settings Select “Save” or “Load.” TIP It's best not to connect several USB storage devices when backing up your data. When several devices are connected, a specific device cannot be identified for saving data. CAUTION Do not execute “FullBackup” during file operations such as loading songs. Doing so could result in damage to the data. TIP It may take 1 – 2 minutes to complete the backup. CAUTION Do not turn off the power during full backup. Doing so could result in damage to the data. TIP Protected songs (indicated by MS/Ms in the display) cannot be saved. Move the songs to the USB storage device before executing Full Backup. If you do not move the protected songs and keep the data only in the internal memory, the data will be deleted when you load the backup settings to the instrument. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 103 Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message AccessError • This message appears when data has failed to be written or loaded to the Storage memory or USB storage device. When you write or load data via USB storage device, check the USB cable connection and try again. If you still see this message, the Storage memory/ media/device may have malfunctioned or may be damaged. • This message appears when a Read-Only file is selected to be overwritten. The file cannot to be overwritten. AllFiles?--> When you delete a folder, this message asks you whether you want to delete all of the files in that folder. To delete all files in the folder, press the D [+ (YES)] button. To cancel, press the D [– (NO)] button. AccessError Detailed Settings BackupMemoryFull This message will appear when there is insufficient empty space in backup memory. Turn the power switch off and turn it on again to delete unnecessary backup data. CalibrationError DefaultReset This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible and the settings reset to their default values. In this case, perform the automatic adjustment once again. Calibration Speaker sound is off This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible because no sound is output from the rear speaker. In this case if the “Speaker” setting is Off, turn “Speaker” On. If “Speaker” is set to Normal and headphones are connected, unplug the headphones. Calibration Sure?--> Test sound is output. This message will appear to confirm start of the iAFC calibration. When calibrating, a test tone will sound from the instrument. Canceled This message confirms that the operation has been cancelled. Caution ProtectedSong Completed This message appears when you do the following operation to a protected song: • Overwrite (protected songs cannot be overwritten) • Save with a new name (protected songs cannot be used with “Save as” function) • Delete (this message confirms that the protected song will be deleted) • Rename (renamed protected songs may not be played back) This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. DriveError This message appears when a communication error occurred between the instrument and drive. Check the USB cable connection and try again. If you still see this message, use a drive whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). DriveNumLimitOver The number of drives exceeds the limitation. Two USB storage devices can be connected to one USB [TO DEVICE] terminal using a hub device. This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. DrivePowerError The power consumption of the connected USB device exceeds the predetermined value. When a bus-powered USB hub is used, this message appears. The USB hub must be selfpowered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. DriveRemoved 104 Meaning CLP-380 Owner’s Manual This message appears when the USB storage device is removed from the instrument. Message List FactorySet Restart Meaning DuplicateName When you attempted to rename a song and save it in “Rename” (page 43), this message will appear if an identically-named song already exists. Three seconds after this message is displayed, you will return to the previous screen. Please specify a different name. Execute?--> This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. Executing The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. Completed This message appears when factory set is completed. The instrument is then restarted. FactorySet Executing MemorySongExcluded The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 102) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 102). FactorySet Executing MemorySongIncluded The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 102) have been restored. FullBackup Restart This message will appear when loading of the backup file is completed. The instrument is then restarted. Completed HostError There is a problem with the USB [TO HOST] terminal • When using the CLP-380 connected to your personal computer: The driver or MIDI application on your computer is not functioning correctly, perhaps because the computer is turned off, the cable is not connected correctly. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-380 and your computer, and check the cable connections. Then turn on the power in the order of your computer → CLP-380, and check that the driver and MIDI application on your computer are functioning correctly. • When using the CLP-380 by itself: This message may appear if a cable is left connected to the USB [TO HOST] terminal of the CLP-380. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-380, disconnect the cable, and then turn on the power again. If the cable is left connected, the CLP-380 may not function correctly. LastPowerOffIllegal MemoryChecking This message will appear when the power is turned on after turning off the power while saving a song or internal settings. The internal memory is being checked while this message appears. If the internal settings are damaged, they will be reset to the initial settings. If Memory songs are damaged, they will be deleted. MakeDir ---:Select USB Drive This message appears when you attempt to create a folder to a USB storage device that cannot be accessed. Check that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument and that the [SELECT] switch specifies the appropriate device, then try again. NoFile MemoryFull There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Save songs to an external device (page 42) or delete some songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory. NoDrive A USB storage device was not connected to the instrument when you attempted to perform a drive-related function. Connect the device and continue. Detailed Settings Message • This message will appear when there is no file to load from the media, even if the file name is displayed. Securely insert the media. • This message will appear when two-byte letters are included in the file name. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 105 Message List Message Meaning NoSongToCopy You tried to copy a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button. NoSongToMove You tried to move a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button. NoSongToRename You tried to rename a song that does not exist in the Storage memory or on USB storage device. Select a Memory song or External song via the [SONG SELECT] button. OverCurrent The connection has been cut off because of an abnormal power surge to the drive. To recover from this, turn the power switch of the hub off and on again, or disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and turn the power switch of the instrument off and on again. Overwrite?--> Detailed Settings PC<->CLP InCommunication This message appears when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to the instrument. When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument. PleaseWait You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. ProtectedDrive ProtectedDriveError ProtectedFile ProtectedFileFormatError ProtectedSong This message appears when you try to write (save), copy, or delete data on a protected drive/ media. Set protect to off and try again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk. This message appears when a protected song and the drive are not compatible. Use a drive whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such files. This message appears when you play back a protected song which has a file format error. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a USB storage device. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to such a disk. ProtectedSong:UseMove This message appears when you copy a protected song. Protected songs cannot be copied. However, you can move the song (page 45). SecuritySongIsProtected CannotSave This message appears when you attempt to save a protected song (security song). Protected songs cannot be saved. Set?--> 106 This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. Message List Message Meaning SongChanged Clear? This message appears when you record or edit the protected song and select another song. The recorded/edited protected song cannot be saved. The song will be deleted when you select another song. SongChanged Save? You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory or an external device. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “Save” parameter screen. Save the recorded song and proceed to another operation. SongError This message will appear if a problem is found with the song data when you select a song or while the song is playing. In this case, reselect the song, and try once again to play it back. If the message still appears, the song data may have been damaged. Start?--> Sure?--> SystemLimit This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. This message appears when the number of files and folders exceeds the system limit. The maximum number of files/folders which can be stored in a folder is 250. Try again after deleting/moving the unnecessary file(s). UnformattedDrive You tried to perform a file- or drive-related operation using an unformatted media. Eject the media, format it using the “Format” parameter (page 46), then try again. UnformattedDrive Format? You tried to perform a file- or drive-related operation using an unformatted media. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the format parameter (page 46). UnsupportedDrive This message appears when you connect an unsupported drive. Use a drive whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). WrongDrive • The connected drive does not support use of protected songs. Use only drives whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). • This message appears when the connected USB storage device is damaged and cannot be accessed. WrongName You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-380, and the CLP380 could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. WrongSelection Detailed Settings 1. This message will be displayed if current memory fills up during recording. Recording will stop automatically at this point. The data that had been recorded up to that point will remain. This message will also be displayed when you attempt to enter Record mode for additional recording if that song already occupies all of current memory. In this case, additional recording will not be possible. If there is an already-recorded part that you do not need to keep, you can use “ChannelClear” (page 84) to delete the unneeded part, so that you will then be able to record the equivalent amount of additional material. 2. This message will be displayed when you select a song if that song is larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 39). This song cannot be loaded into the CLP-380, and cannot be played back. Please select a different song. SongTooBig This message appears when, in copying a song, the same folder has been selected for both the source and destination. You cannot select the same folder for both the source and destination. Select the different folder as the destination folder. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 107 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains indefinitely and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the CHURCH ORGAN, JAZZ ORGAN, STRINGS, CHOIR group, or some voices in the XG group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. Detailed Settings ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C -2 – G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A -1 – C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C -2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press the [SONG SELECT] button once. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. Part data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording part for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 27). Therefore, if the part already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the parts: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Note data (notes you play) Voice selection Clavinova pedals and external pedal on/off Reverb depth [ReverbSend] Chorus depth [ChorusSend] DSP effect depth [DSPDepth] Sound brightness [Brightness] Resonance effect setting [HarmonicContent] Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting [EQLowFreq.] Equalizer’s low-range gain setting [EQLowGain] Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting [EQHighFreq.] Equalizer’s high-range gain setting [EQHighGain] Octave setting of the voice [Octave] Volume setting of each voice [Volume] Left/right position of each sound [Pan] Fine pitch adjustment between two voices (Dual only) [Detune] • Volume change in response to playing strength for each voice [TouchSense] Data recorded globally in all parts: ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording part is selected and a red part indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. 108 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual • • • • • Tempo Time signature Reverb type Chorus type DSP effect type You can change all data except for note data, Octave setting or Time Signature after recording. Questions about Operations and Functions ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 39): About 300KB • Storage memory (page 39): About 1,513KB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 98) in the “FUNCTION” menu to change the external pedal setting. ■ The song title is not correct. Detailed Settings The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 47) in the FILE/SONG SETTING menu to change the setting. However, if the song was recorded on another instrument, changing the “CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve the problem. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. The MIDI note-on velocity data is not changed. It changes the volume level at the same velocity data. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity of an instrument. The MIDI note-on velocity data is changed when you play the keyboard with a consistent touch. ■ Only “PhraseMark” can be selected via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song playback. The “PhraseMark” parameter can only be set via the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button during song playback. If you desired to select other parameters, stop the song and try once again. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 109 Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Solution The power of the Clavinova does not turn on. The power cable is not plugged in (check at the Clavinova and at the electrical outlet). Insert the power cable plug firmly into the Clavinova and into the electrical outlet of the correct voltage (page 15). There is a clicking noise when you press the [POWER] button to turn the power on or off. This is caused by the electrical power within the instrument. This is not a malfunction. Noise is heard from the Clavinova. A portable telephone is being used near the Clavinova (or the ring tone is sounding). Turn off the power of the portable telephone located near the Clavinova. Noise may be heard if a portable telephone is used near the Clavinova or if the ring tone occurs. The overall volume is too low. Or, there is no sound at all. The [MASTER VOLUME] dial is lowered. Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial (page 16). The volume level for the keyboard performance is set too low. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider toward the keyboard to increase the keyboard volume. Headphones are connected (only if the Speaker setting is “Normal HeadphoneSW”) (page 99). Disconnect the headphone plug. Speaker setting is off. Set [Speaker] to “Normal” or “ON” (page 99). Local Control is turned off. Set Local Control ON (page 100). “Expression” is assigned to the right pedal or the AUX pedal. Assign any function other than “Expression” to the pedal. The keyboard volume is lower than the song playback volume. The volume level for the keyboard performance is set too low. Move the [SONG BALANCE] slider toward the keyboard to increase the keyboard volume. Sound is still heard from the speakers even though headphones are plugged in. Speaker setting is On. Set the speaker setting to “Normal (HeadphoneSW)” (page 99). The tone quality and/or volume from the speaker or headphones has changed. Plugs are connected to the AUX OUT jacks. Disconnect the plugs. Feedback occurs when you turn iAFC on. iAFC was not automatically adjusted correctly. Turn iAFC OFF, and perform the automatic adjustment (page 93). Damper pedal does not function. The plug of the pedal cable is not inserted into the [PEDAL] jack. Plug the pedal cable firmly into the [PEDAL] jack. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand Assembly” beginning on page 117.) Appendix 110 Cause CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Problem Cause Solution The USB storage device is not recognized by the instrument. The USB storage device may not be recognized by the instrument depending on the timing of the device connection or the setting of the [SELECT] switch. Disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again and select a device using the [SELECT] switch. To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG SELECT] button to engage song selection mode or press the [FILE/SONG SETTING] button to engage file/song setting mode. If you try to engage these modes before connecting the USB storage device, press the [EXIT] button to exit the mode and re-engage the mode. If the device is still not recognized, it may not be supported by Yamaha. Only use devices supported by Yamaha (page 122). The USB storage device has hung up (stopped). The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. Only use devices whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 122). The USB storage device does not operate properly. Disconnect the device and connect it to the instrument again. A maximum of 13 characters from a folder name can be displayed. Therefore, if several folders have the same 13 characters at the start of their names, it will appear that they do not change when the C [–][+] buttons are pressed. Shorten long folder names on your computer before using them. The folder name does not change. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Appendix Troubleshooting 111 Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CLP-380, and whether or not the CLP-380 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Basic Check Points Voice Allocation Format The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below. • Sequence format • Voice allocation format • Disk Format (floppy disk drive is optional) With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. Sequence Format The CLP-380 is compatible with the following formats. The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. ■ GM System Level 1 Appendix This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. The CLP-380 is compatible with the following formats. ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. • Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CLP-380 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Performance data recorded on the CLP-380 is saved in the SMF format 0. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. 112 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual ■ GM System Level 2 “GM System Level 2” is a standard specification hat enhances the original “GM System Level 1” and improves song data compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater voice selection, expanded voice parameters, and integrated effect processing. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the CLP-380 using voices in the XG category is XG-compatible. Data Compatibility ■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also common format used with various Yamaha software. ■ GS GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more voices and drum kits and their variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects. Appendix Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. Disk format It is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 113 Preset Voice List : Yes ×: No Voice group Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance GrandPiano1 This sound was newly sampled from a full concert grand piano. Five stages of dynamics were sampled, and no effort has been spared in making the sound virtually identical to that of an acoustic piano. Even the tonal changes produced by the damper pedal and the subtle sounds of releasing a key are reproduced. The sympathetic vibration (string resonance) that occurs between the strings of an acoustic piano has also been simulated. Suitable not only for classical compositions but also for piano pieces of any style. MellowPiano A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for classical music. RockPiano A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles. GRAND PIANO1 HonkyTonk Piano GRAND PIANO2 Voice description × A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal character that is quite different than a grand piano. GrandPiano2 × × × A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright resonance. Ideal for popular music. BrightPiano × × × A spacious and bright piano sound. Ideal for popular and rock music. × × An electronic piano sound produced by an FM synthesizer. The tone will change as you vary your playing touch. Ideal for popular music. × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. × A different type of electric piano sound. Widely used in rock and popular music. E.Piano1 × SynthPiano × E.Piano2 × Vintage E.Piano × E.PIANO1 Appendix × E.PIANO2 Harpsichord8' × × × The sound of the instrument frequently used in baroque music. Variations in playing touch will not affect the volume, and a characteristic sound will be heard when you release the key. Harpsichord 8'+4' × × × A harpsichord with an added upper octave. Produces a more brilliant sound. HARPSI CHORD E.CLAVI CHORD × E.Clavichord × × × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. Wah Clavi. × × × A distinctive effect is preset. × × Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. × × A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for spaciousness and realism. Vibraphone × Marimba VIBRAPHONE Celesta × × The sound of a celesta (a percussion instrument in which hammers strike metallic bars to produce sound). This instrument is well-known for its appearance in “Dance of the Sugar-plum Fairies” from Tchaikovsky’s “Nutcracker Suite.” NylonGuitar × × A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound. Enjoy the atmosphere it adds to a quiet song. × × A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular music. GUITAR SteelGuitar 114 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual × × Voice group CHURCH ORGAN JAZZORGAN Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description PipeOrgan Principal × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. PipeOrgan Tutti × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. Voice name Stereo sampling PipeOrgan Flute1 × × × × A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type (woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8' + 4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for accompanying hymns. PipeOrgan Flute2 × × × × A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type (woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8' + 4' + 1-1/3'). This is brighter than PipeOrganFlute1, and is suitable for solos. JazzOrgan × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. RotaryOrgan × × × × × A bright electric organ sound. MellowOrgan × × × × × A mellow electric organ sound. Ideal for calmer songs. × × × Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the Dual mode. × × × A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. × × × The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO. Strings STRINGS SynthStrings × SlowStrings CHOIR Choir × × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir × × × × The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO. Scat × × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. SynthPad1 × × × × A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. SynthPad2 × × × × A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. WoodBass × × × The sound of a finger-plucked upright bass. Frequently used in jazz and Latin music. Bass&Cymbal × × × The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto the bass. Effective when used for jazz walking-bass lines. ElectricBass × × × × The sound of an electric bass. Frequently used in jazz, rock, and popular music. FretlessBass × × × × The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for styles such as jazz and fusion. SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS Appendix Preset Voice List E.BASS CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 115 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 This combination is often used in popular music. MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are one octave apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads. MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + E.Clavichord This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (page 88) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination makes a very brilliant sound. Split Appendix Dual + Split 116 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Assemble the stand on a flat floor with ample space. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the box. Confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. A Connector panel AC IN Styrofoam pads B 6 x 25mm long screws x 4 Headphone hanger 6 x 16mm short screws x 6 Cord holders x 2 4 x 14mm thin screws x 8 AC power cord 4 x 20mm tapping screws x 5 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) Appendix Take out the styrofoam pads, and place A on top of the pads. Position the styrofoam pads to protect the connector panel at the bottom of A and the AC IN. C Pedal cord D E F 4 x 10mm thin screws x 2 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 117 Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 2-3 Attach E and F to D. 1-1 Secure D using the four 6 x 25mm long screws. 1-2 Remove the twist tie from the folded pedal cord. Do not remove the twist tie located next to the hole. Don’t discard the twist tie, you’ll need it later in step 6. E 1-2 2-4 F 3. Lay A into position. Align the screw threads on the bottom of A with the screw threads of E and F, while gently lowering A into position. D 1-1 Appendix 2. A Attach B. 15cm 2-1 Insert B between E and F as shown in the illustration. F 15cm F E B D E Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of A when positioning it. CAUTION Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. 2-2 Align and attach B to the front side of D, E and F. 2-3 Secure B using the 4 x 14mm thin screws. * Insert two screws into the smaller holes on the brackets. 2-4 Temporarily secure with 4 x 14mm thin screws. * Insert four screws into the smaller holes on the brackets. 118 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual CAUTION Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. Keyboard Stand Assembly 4. 5. Attach A. 4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right Connect the speaker cord. ends of A will project beyond E and F equally (as seen from the rear). 5-1 Remove the twist tie attaching the speaker cord. 5-2 Insert the speaker cord plug into the connector so 4-2 Secure A using two 6 x 16mm short screws from that the tab extends toward the front when viewed from the rear. the rear. 4-3 Secure A using four 6 x 16mm short screws from the front. 4-1 5-2 Connect the pedal cord. Appendix 6. 6-1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the [PEDAL] connector. 6-2 Attach the cord holders to the instrument, then 4-2 4-3 4-4 Firmly tighten the screws from the upper parts clip the cord into the holders. At this time, be careful that the pedal cord isn’t loose between the plug and cord holder. 6-3 Use a twist tie to bundle the pedal cord. you temporarily fastened in step 2-4 above (assembly B). 6-1 B 6-2 6-3 4-4 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 119 Keyboard Stand Assembly 7. Attach C. Voltage Selector 7-1 Place on D, the stopper-wood at the bottom edges of C, then secure the top. 7-2 Secure upper right and left of C using two 4 x 14mm thin screws. 7-3 Secure upper center and lower of C using five 4 x 20mm tapping screws. 7-2 Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the [AC IN] and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. 7-1 C D C 9. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Appendix 7-3 8. Connect the power cord. Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC IN]. 10.Attach the headphone hanger. You can attach a headphone hanger on the Clavinova to hang the headphones. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. For models that feature a voltage selector: 220 240 110 127 120 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Set the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage. Keyboard Stand Assembly After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? After transporting the instrument, do the following to ensure optimum performance of the iAFC function (page 92): • Place the Clavinova so that its rear panel is at least 10 cm away from the wall. • Perform the automatic adjustment of the iAFC function (page 93). Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Is the power cord inserted securely into the socket? Check the connection. Appendix • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit and by the handles in the rear panel. Do not hold the key cover. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Hold here. Do not hold here. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 121 Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. n For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices Connecting USB device • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) • USB hub • USB-LAN adaptor • When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ n Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. CAUTION When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB device may be damaged. Appendix • If you intend to connect two or three devices at the same time to a terminal, you should use a USB hub device. The USB hub must be self-powered (with its own power source) and the power must be on. Only one USB hub can be used. If an error message appears while using the USB hub, disconnect the hub from the instrument, then turn on the power of the instrument and re-connect the USB hub. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. 122 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. n Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. This instrument has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and one on the terminal at the front. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A Select the desired terminal SELECT USB TO DEVICE Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 46). CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. Proceed with caution, especially when connecting multiple USB storage media. To protect your data (write-protect) Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the front. CAUTION While the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Appendix USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data. n If you connect USB storage devices to both USB [TO DEVICE] terminals, the devices may not operate properly. The number of USB storage device to be used CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Up to two USB storage devices can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. (If necessary, use a USB hub. The number of USB storage devices that can be used simultaneously with musical instruments even when a USB hub is used is a maximum of two.) This instrument can recognize up to four drives in one USB storage device. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 123 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks (Optional) An optional floppy disk drive can be installed to this instrument. For instructions on installing the floppy disk drive, see page 125. The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument. Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Floppy Disk Compatibility 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Formatting a Floppy Disk If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 46. Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the disk contains important data. Appendix n Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be useable as is on other devices. Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. n Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Removing a Floppy Disk After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try reinserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. 124 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head cleaning disks. About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk's write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s writeprotect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). Write-protect tab open (protect position) Installing the Floppy Disk Drive (Optional) The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. 1. Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. 3. Attach the drive and case assembly to the left underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4mm x 10mm). Appendix Insert the drive to the case, with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case. 4. Dual-sided adhesive tape 2. Connect the USB cable to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 125 Options ■ BC-100 Bench A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova. ■ HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads. ■ UD-FD01 USB-FDD Unit Floppy disk drive for connecting to the instrument and saving/loading data. Appendix 126 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Specifications Size/Weight CLP-380 Dimensions Weight Keyboard Pedal Control Interface Display Cabinet 1406mm (55 3/8") Height 943mm (37 1/8") With music rest: 1037mm (40 13/16") Depth 512mm (20 3/16") Weight 95kg (209 lb 7 oz) Number of Keys 88 Type NW (Natural Wood) with synthetic ivory keytops (with real-wood white keys) Touch Sensitivity Yes Number of Pedals 3 Half Pedal Yes Functions Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft Type LCD Size 24-character x 2-line Color Monochrome Contrast Yes Language English, Japanese Panel Language English Key Cover Key Cover Style Sliding Music Rest Yes Music Clips Yes Tone Generation Technology AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Number of Dynamic Levels 5 Stereo Sustain Samples Yes Key-off Samples Yes String Resonance Yes Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 128 Preset Number of Voices 38 + 480 XG + 12 Drum Kits XG Yes GS Yes GM Yes Tone Generation Voices Width Appendix Item Compatibility Types Effects GM2 Yes Reverb 5 Chorus 3 Brilliance 7 DSP 12 iAFC Yes Dual/Layers Yes Split Yes Number of Preset Songs 50 Number of Songs (max.) 250 Number of Tracks 16 Data Capacity 1.47MB Functions Preset Songs Recording Compatible Data Format Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1), ESEQ Recording SMF (Format 0) CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 127 Specifications Item Functions CLP-380 Overall Controls Storage Storage and Connectivity Metronome Yes Tempo Range 5 – 500 Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12 Tuning Yes Scale Type 7 types Floppy Disk Drive Optional Internal Memory 1.47MB External Drives (USB Storage Device) Optional Headphones x2 MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] AUX IN [L/L+R][R] AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] Connectors [AUX PEDAL] Yes USB [TO DEVICE] x 2 (selectable) USB [TO HOST] Yes [LAN] Yes Amplifiers 35W x 2 + 20W x 2 + 20W x 2 + 12W x 2 Speakers 16cm x 2, 2.5cm (DOME) x 2, 8cm x 4 Tri-Amp System Yes Service Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Yes Bundled Software CD-ROM Yes Included Accessories Owner’s Manual, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection, AC Power Cord, Bench (included or optional depending on locale), Data List, My Yamaha Product User Registration Amplifiers and Speakers Appendix Accessories * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 128 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. 50 greats for the Piano ................................................................. 7 50 Piano Preset Songs ................................................................ 19 Practicing a one-hand part ........................................... 21 A A – D [–][+] buttons ................................................................. 12 A-B repeat .................................................................................. 22 Accessories ................................................................................... 7 Adding variation to the sound ➔ Effect function .................... 25 Assembly .................................................................................. 117 Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to a pedal ...... 98 AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ........................................................ 73 AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks .................................................... 73 [AUX PEDAL] jack .................................................................... 72 Auxiliary pedal function ............................................................ 97 B Backup .............................................................................. 102, 103 Bench ............................................................................................ 7 BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/[BRIGHT] buttons ...................... 25 C Calibration ................................................................................. 93 Center pedal ............................................................................... 24 Center pedal function ................................................................ 96 CharacterCode ........................................................................... 47 Characters .................................................................................. 47 [CHORUS] button .................................................................... 26 combining two voices ➔ Dual mode ........................................ 27 Connection computer ....................................................................... 75 Other Components ....................................................... 72 Speaker .......................................................................... 73 USB [TO HOST] .......................................................... 76 [CONTRAST] knob .................................................................. 15 CONTRAST* ............................................................................. 15 Copy ........................................................................................... 44 Current memory ........................................................................ 39 Current song .............................................................................. 39 D Damper (right) pedal ................................................................ 24 Data Compatibility .................................................................. 112 Data type .................................................................................... 50 Default (Normal) setting* ......................................................... 25 Delete .......................................................................................... 43 [DEMO] button ......................................................................... 17 Demonstration tunes ................................................................. 17 Detailed Settings ........................................................................77 Function ........................................................................94 iAFC ...............................................................................92 Metronome ...................................................................85 recording and playback ................................................82 voices .............................................................................86 display .........................................................................................12 Display contrast .........................................................................15 DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) ..........................................113 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20 metronome ....................................................................30 Driver ..........................................................................................75 Dual Detailed settings ............................................................86 Recording ......................................................................38 Dual mode ➔ combining two voices ........................................27 E Effect function ............................................................................25 equalizer .....................................................................................90 ESEQ .........................................................................................112 [EXIT] button ............................................................................13 External song ..............................................................................39 [EXTRA PARTS] button .....................................................31, 35 Appendix Numerics F FactorySet .................................................................................102 Fast forward ..........................................................................20, 49 FILE* ...........................................................................................39 [FILE/SONG SETTING] button .........................................39, 82 Floppy Disk ......................................................................124, 125 Floppy Disk Drive ....................................................................125 Format ........................................................................................46 [FUNCTION] button ..........................................................79, 94 G GM System Level 1 ...................................................................112 GM System Level 2 ...................................................................112 GS ..............................................................................................113 H Headphones ...............................................................................16 I iAFC iAFC Detailed settings ..................................................92 [iAFC SETTING] button .....................................................78, 92 Internet Direct Connection (IDC) ............................................51 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 129 Index J N Jacks AUX IN ......................................................................... 73 AUX OUT ..................................................................... 73 AUX PEDAL ................................................................. 72 PHONES ....................................................................... 16 K key cover ..................................................................................... 14 KeyOffSampling ......................................................................... 99 L LCD ➔ Screen Contrast ......................................................................... 15 Left .............................................................................................. 86 Left × Layer ................................................................................ 86 [LEFT] button ................................................................ 21, 31, 35 Left pedal .................................................................................... 24 Left pedal function ..................................................................... 96 List Demonstration tunes .................................................... 17 Detailed Settings ........................................................... 77 Message ....................................................................... 104 Preset Voice ................................................................. 114 Appendix M M ................................................................................................. 40 Main ........................................................................................... 86 Main × Layer .............................................................................. 86 MakeDir ..................................................................................... 45 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ........................................................ 16 MASTER VOLUME* ................................................................. 16 MEMORY .................................................................................. 48 Memory ...................................................................................... 39 Memory song ............................................................................. 39 MemoryBackup ....................................................................... 102 Message List ............................................................................. 104 METRONOME [ON/OFF] button ........................................... 30 METRONOME [SETTING] button ................................... 77, 85 MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] terminals ....................................... 72 MIDI cables ................................................................................ 76 Midi settings ............................................................................... 79 MIDI terminals .......................................................................... 76 Move ........................................................................................... 45 MP .............................................................................................. 40 MS ............................................................................................... 40 Ms ............................................................................................... 40 Music braces ............................................................................... 14 Music Data ................................................................................. 48 Music rest ................................................................................... 14 130 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual New Song ....................................................................................31 Normal setting* ..........................................................................25 O Other settings .............................................................................94 P P ..................................................................................................40 Parameter List ............................................................................77 Pedal Function Auxiliary ........................................................................97 Center ............................................................................96 Left .................................................................................96 Right ..............................................................................96 Pedals ..........................................................................................24 Personal computer .....................................................................75 [PHONES] jacks ........................................................................16 PhraseMark ................................................................................82 PLAY/PAUSE 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20 Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49 [PLAY/PAUSE] button ........................................................20, 49 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20 Demo Songs ..................................................................17 Recorded Songs and Music Data .................................49 Playing back repeatedly (song) .................................................82 playing two voices ➔ Split mode ..............................................28 [POWER] switch ........................................................................15 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) ...........................21 PRESET 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................19 Preset song memory ..................................................................39 Preset Voice List .......................................................................114 R [REC] button .............................................................................32 Recording in Dual ......................................................................38 Recording in Split ......................................................................38 Recording Your Performance ...................................................31 Rename .......................................................................................43 [REPEAT] button ......................................................................22 Repeat Playback .........................................................................22 Re-recording a song partially ....................................................33 [REVERB] button ......................................................................26 Rewind ..................................................................................20, 49 [RIGHT] button ............................................................ 21, 31, 35 Right pedal .................................................................................24 Right pedal function ..................................................................96 RIGHT/LEFT 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................21 Index Save ............................................................................................. 42 Scale ............................................................................................ 95 Select 50 piano preset songs ................................................... 19 Demo Songs .................................................................. 17 [SELECT] switch ...................................................................... 123 Selecting a touch response ......................................................... 94 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ...................................................... 112 Soft (left) pedal .......................................................................... 24 Song Data Type ...................................................................... 50 Detailed settings ............................................................ 82 Playing back repeatedly ................................................ 82 [SONG BALANCE] slider ......................................................... 38 SONG SELECT Recorded Songs and Music Data ................................. 48 [SONG SELECT] button ..................................................... 19, 48 SongAutoOpen .......................................................................... 46 Sostenuto (center) pedal ........................................................... 24 Sound brilliance ........................................................................ 25 expression ..................................................................... 25 reverberation ................................................................. 26 spread and spaciousness ............................................... 26 Soundboard reverb .................................................................... 26 Split Detailed settings ............................................................ 86 Recording ...................................................................... 38 [SPLIT] button .......................................................................... 28 Split mode ➔ playing two voices .............................................. 28 Split point ................................................................................... 29 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 28 STOP 50 Piano Preset Songs ................................................... 20 Recorded Songs and Music Data ................................. 49 [STOP] button ..................................................................... 20, 49 Storage memory ......................................................................... 39 StringResonance ........................................................................ 99 SustainSampling ........................................................................ 99 Sync Start 50 preset songs .............................................................. 21 Recorded Songs and Music Data ................................. 49 Transpose ...................................................................................94 Troubleshooting .......................................................................110 Tune ............................................................................................95 Type of characters ......................................................................47 Type of data (recorded) ...........................................................108 U U1 ...............................................................................................40 U1P .............................................................................................40 U1S .............................................................................................40 U1s ..............................................................................................40 UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................20 metronome ....................................................................30 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal .....................................................72 USB [TO HOST] terminal ........................................................72 USB1 ...........................................................................................48 V Voice group buttons ............................................................23, 28 [VOICE SETTING] button .......................................................78 Voices* ........................................................................................23 Detailed settings ............................................................86 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) ...........................................38 Setting ............................................................................16 Appendix S X XG .............................................................................................112 T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs ................................................... 20 metronome ................................................................... 30 Recorded Songs and Music Data ................................. 49 TEMPO [UP] [DOWN] buttons .............................................. 30 Terminals MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] ................................... 72, 76 USB [TO DEVICE] ...................................................... 72 USB [TO HOST] .......................................................... 72 TouchResponse .......................................................................... 94 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 131 Memo 132 CLP-380 Owner’s Manual Memo CLP-380 Owner’s Manual 133 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Piano Model Name : CLP-380PE/380PM This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) (class B) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB49 Clavinova Web site http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2008 Yamaha Corporation WM91210 903MWAP3.2-05D0 Printed in China